Project No: 7902 Building 3000 - NOCCCD

Project No: 7902 Building 3000 September 2, 2016 Fullerton College

TABLE OF CONTENTS 000000 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL

23 0000 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0517 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC 23 0548 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 23 0553 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION 23 0719 INSULATION FOR EXPOSED PIPING & EQUIPMENT 23 0923 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 0951 INSTRUMENTATION 23 0993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2116 HYDRONIC SYSTEM SPECIALTIES 23 2513 WATER TREATMENT CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEM 23 3113 DUCTWORK 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3416 FANS 23 7413 CUSTOM AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 7416.11 PACKAGED, SMALL-CAPACITY, ROOPTOP HEAT PUMP UNITS

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 26 2813 FUSES 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 1

SECTION 230000 – GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SCOPE

A. Basic mechanical requirements specifically applicable to Division 23 Sections.

B. Work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Labor, materials, services, equipment, and appliances required for completion of tasks as

indicated on drawing or in specification or as inherently necessary to prepare spaces and systems for new installations as follows: a. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment b. Testing, adjusting and balancing

1.3 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Drawings accompanying these Specifications show intent of Work to be done. Specifications shall identify quality and grade of installation and where equipment and hardware is not particularly specified, Contractor shall provide submittals for all products and install them per manufacturers’ recommendations, and in a first class manner.

B. Examine Drawings and Specifications for elements in connection with this Work; visit the site and determine existing and new general construction conditions and be familiar with all limitations caused by such conditions.

C. Plans are intended to show general arrangement and extent of Work contemplated. Exact location and arrangement of parts shall be determined after the Owner has reviewed equipment, as Work progresses, to conform in best possible manner with surroundings, and as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

D. Contract Documents are in part diagrammatic and intended to show the scope and general arrangement of the Work under this Contract. The Contractor shall follow these drawings in laying out the equipment, piping and ductwork. Drawings are not intended to be scaled for roughing in measurements or to serve as shop drawings. Where job conditions require minor changes or adjustments in the indicated locations or arrangement of the Work, such changes shall be made without change in the Contract amount.

E. Follow dimensions without regard to scale. Where no figures or notations are given, the Plans shall be followed.

1.4 APPLICABLE REFERENCE STANDARDS, CODES AND REGULATIONS:

A. Meet requirements of all state codes having jurisdiction.



B. State of California Code of Regulations: 1. Title 8, Industrial Relations 2. Title 19, State Fire Marshal Regulations 3. 2013 California Building Code (CBC), Title 24, Part 2 4. 2013 California Electrical Code, Title 24, Part 3 5. 2013 California Mechanical Code, Title 24, Part 4 6. 2013 California Plumbing Code, Title 24, Part 5 7. 2013 California Fire Code, Title 24, Part 9 8. 2013 California Standards Code, Title 24, Part 12 9. Title 24, Energy Conservation Standards 10. 2013 California Green Building Standards Code, Title 24, Part 11

C. Codes and ordinances having jurisdiction over Work are minimum requirements; but, if Contract Documents indicate requirements, which are in excess of those minimum requirements, then requirements of the Contract Documents shall be followed. Should there be any conflicts between Contract Documents or codes or any ordinances having jurisdiction, report these to the Owner’s Representative.

D. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction.

1.5 PROJECT AND SITE CONDITIONS

A. The arrangement of and connection to equipment shown on the drawings is based upon information available and is not intended to show exact dimensions peculiar to a specific manufacturer. The Drawings are, in part, diagrammatic and some features of the illustrated equipment installations may require revision to meet actual equipment installation requirements. Structural supports, housekeeping pads, piping connections and adjacent equipment may have to be altered to accommodate the equipment provided. No additional payment will be made for such revisions or alterations.

B. Examine all Drawings and Specifications to be fully cognizant of all work required under this Division.

C. Examine site related work and surfaces before starting work of any Section.

D. Install Work in locations shown on approved Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.

E. Prepare revised shop drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission from the Owner’s Representative before proceeding.

F. Beginning work of any Section constitutes acceptance of conditions.

1.6 COOPERATION WITH WORK UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS

A. Cooperate with other trades to facilitate general progress of Work. Allow all other trades every reasonable opportunity for installation of their work.

B. Work under this Division shall follow general building construction closely. Set pipe sleeves and inserts and verify that openings for chases and pipes are provided.

C. Work with other trades in determining exact location of outlets, pipes, and pieces of equipment to avoid interference with lines required to maintain proper installation of Work.



D. Make such progress in the Work to not delay work of other trades.

E. Mechanical Work shall have precedence over the other in the following sequence: 1. Soil and waste piping 2. Hydronic piping 3. Ductwork 4. Domestic water piping

1.7 DISCREPANCIES

A. The Contractor shall check all Drawings furnished him immediately upon their receipt and shall promptly notify the Owner’s Representative of any discrepancies. Figures marked on Drawings shall in general be followed in preference to scale measurements. Piping and instrumentation diagrams shall in general govern floor plans and sections. Large-scale drawings shall in general govern small-scale drawings.

B. Where requirements between Drawings and Specifications conflict, the more restrictive provisions shall apply.

C. If any part of the Specifications or Drawings appears unclear or contradictory, apply to Owner’s Representative for interpretation and decision as early as possible, including during bidding period. Do not proceed with such work without Owner Representatives decision. Beginning work of any Section constitutes acceptance of conditions.

1.8 CHANGES

A. The Contractor shall be responsible to make and obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative for all necessary adjustments in piping and equipment layouts as required to accommodate the relocations of equipment and/or devices, which are affected by any approved authorized changes or Product substitutions. All changes shall be clearly indicated on the "Record" drawings.

1.9 SUBMITTALS

A. For each Division 23 submittal section, provide the following: 1. The manufacturer, contractor or supplier shall resubmit the specification section and shall

include a written statement that the submitted equipment, hardware or accessory complies with the requirement of that particular section. Next to each specification item, indicate the following: a. “No Exception Taken”. b. “Exception”. All exceptions shall be clearly identified by referencing respective

paragraph and other requirements along with proposed alternative.

B. Submit all Division 23 shop drawings and product data grouped and referenced by the specification technical section numbers in one complete submittal package. 1. Individual or partial submittals are not acceptable and will be returned without review.

C. Note that prior to acceptance of shop drawings for review, a submittal schedule shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative.

D. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide all shop drawings in latest version of AutoCAD format.



2. Drawings shall be a minimum of 8.5 inches by 11 inches in size with a minimum scale of 1/4-inch per foot, except as specified otherwise.

3. Include installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, accessories, piping, and other items that must be shown to assure a coordinated installation.

4. Indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.

5. If equipment is disapproved, revise drawings to show acceptable equipment and resubmit.

E. Whenever more than one (1) manufacturer’s product is specified, the first named product is the basis of design used in the Work and the use of alternate-named manufacturer’s products or substitutes may require modifications in that design.

F. Proposed Products List: Include Products as required by the individual section in this Division.

G. The Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment ordered and/or installed prior to receipt of shop drawings returned from the Owner’s Representative bearing the Owner’s Representative stamp of "Reviewed". All corrections or modifications to the equipment as noted on the shop drawings shall be performed and equipment removed from the job site at the request of the Owner’s Representative without additional compensation.

H. Manufacturer's Data: For each manufactured item, provide current manufacturer's descriptive literature of cataloged products, certified equipment drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves if applicable, and catalog cuts.

I. Standard Compliance: When materials or equipment provided by the Contractor must conform to the standards of organizations such as American National Standards Institute (ANSI) or American Water Works Association (AWWA), submit proof of such conformance to the Owner Representative for approval. If an organization uses a label or listing to indicate compliance with a particular standard, the label or listing will be acceptable evidence, unless otherwise specified. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, which is competent to perform acceptance testing and is approved by the Owner Representative. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item conforms to the specified organization's standard.

J. Certified Test Reports: Before delivery of materials and equipment, certified copies of all test reports specified in individual sections shall be submitted for approval.

K. Certificates of Compliance or Conformance: Submit manufacturer's certifications as required on products, materials, finish, and equipment indicated in the technical sections. Certifications shall be documents prepared specifically for this Contract. Pre-printed certifications and copies of previously submitted documents will not be acceptable. The manufacturer's certifications shall name the appropriate products, equipment, or materials and the publication specified as controlling the quality of that item. Certification shall not contain statements to imply that the item does not meet requirements specified, such as "as good as"; or "achieve the same end use and results as materials formulated in accordance with the referenced publications"; or "equal or exceed the service and performance of the specified material." Certifications shall simply state that the item conforms to the requirements specified. Certificates shall be printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and shall be signed by the manufacturer's official authorized to sign certificates of compliance or conformance.

1.10 GUARANTEE

A. Except as may be specified under other sections in the Specifications, guarantee all equipment furnished under the Specifications for a period of one year from date of project acceptance



against defective workmanship and material and improper installation. Upon notification of failure, correct deficiency immediately and without cost to the Owner.

B. Standard warranty of manufacturer shall apply for replacement of parts after expiration of the above period. Manufacturer shall furnish replacement parts to the Owner for their service agency as directed.

1.11 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Furnish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel.

B. The operating instructions shall include control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and equipment. Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions as directed. Attach or post operating instructions adjacent to each principal system and equipment. Provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures for operating instructions exposed to the weather. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.

1.12 INSTRUCTION TO THE OWNER PERSONNEL

A. Provide training as specified in individual sections.

B. Before final inspection, instruct the Owner’s designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. Furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the Owner personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.

C. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual sections.

D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with the Owner’s personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

E. Contractor shall video tape all in service training and instruction sessions and provide DVD, properly indexed, for training additional and future maintenance personnel.

F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

G. Submit six copies of Manufacturer’s Instruction Certificates as specified in individual specification Sections.

1.13 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS

A. Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, furnish printed copies of the recommendations prior to installation. Installation of the item shall not proceed until recommendations are received. Failure to furnish recommendations shall be cause for rejection of the equipment or material.



1.14 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.

B. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.

C. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. Record documents shall be available for review by the Construction Inspector and Engineer at all times.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.

F. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Field changes of dimension and detail. 2. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 3. Provide all record documents and shop drawings in electronic format.

G. All changes, deviations and information recorded on the “Project Record Drawings” set during Construction shall be redrafted onto the latest version of AutoCAD. 1. Contractor hand marked or drafted redlined “Project Record Drawings” will not be

accepted.

H. Submit completed shop drawings to the Owner prior to completion in AutoCAD format.

1.15 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the requirements of NFPA 70B P, Appendix I, titled "Equipment Storage and Maintenance During Construction." Replace damaged or defective items with new items.

1.16 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise specified, spare parts, wherever required by detailed specification sections, shall be stored in accordance with the provisions of this paragraph. Spare parts shall be tagged by project equipment number and identified as to part number, equipment manufacturer, and subassembly component (if appropriate). Spare parts subject to deterioration such as ferrous metal items and electrical components shall be properly protected by lubricants or desiccants and encapsulated in hermetically sealed plastic wrapping. Spare parts with individual weights less than 50 pounds and dimensions less than 2 feet wide, or 18 inches high, or 3 feet in length shall be stored in a wooden box with a hinged wooden cover and locking hasp. Hinges shall be strap type. The box shall be painted and identified with stenciled lettering stating the name of the



equipment, equipment numbers, and the words “spare parts.” A neatly type inventory of spare parts shall be taped to the underside of the cover.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Obtain and pay for all permits and inspections, including any independent testing required to verify standard compliance, and deliver certificates for same to the Owner’s Representative.

3.2 WORK RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The drawings indicate diagrammatically the desired locations or arrangement of piping, equipment, etc., and are to be followed as closely as possible. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the work to secure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference with structural conditions.

B. The Contractor is responsible for the correct placing of Work and the proper location and connection of Work in relation to the work of other trades. Advise appropriate trade as to locations of access panels.

C. In the event changes in the indicated locations or arrangements are necessary, due to developed conditions in the building construction or rearrangement of furnishings or equipment, such changes shall be made without extra cost, providing the change is ordered before the ductwork, piping, etc. and work directly connected to same is installed and no extra materials are required.

D. Where equipment is furnished by others, verify dimensions and the correct locations of this equipment before proceeding with the roughing-in of connections.

E. All scaled and figured dimensions are approximate of typical equipment of the class indicated. Before proceeding with any work, carefully check and verify all dimensions, sizes, etc. with the drawings to see that the equipment will fit into the spaces provided without violation of applicable codes.

F. Should any changes to the Work indicated on the Drawings or described in the Specifications be necessary in order to comply with the above requirements, notify the Owner immediately and cease work on all parts of the contract, which are affected until approval for any required modifications to the construction has been obtained from the Owner.

G. Be responsible for any cooperative work, which must be altered due to lack of proper supervision or failure to make proper provisions in time. Such changes shall be under direction of the Owner and shall be made to his satisfaction. Perform all Work with competent and skilled personnel.

H. All work, including aesthetic as well as mechanical aspects of the Work, shall be of the highest quality consistent with the best practices of the trade.

I. Replace or repair, without additional compensation, any work, which, in the opinion of the Owner, does not comply with these requirements.



3.3 PAINTING

A. Factory Applied: 1. Mechanical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems, which shall, as a

minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA ICS 6 corrosion-resistance test, except equipment specified to meet requirements of ANSI C37.20 shall have a finish as specified in ANSI C37.20.

2. Refer to individual sections of this Division for more stringent requirements.

B. Field Applied: 1. Paint all mechanical equipment as required to touch up, to match finish on other equipment

in adjacent spaces or to meet safety criteria. 2. Paint all exposed, uninsulated mechanical piping, valves, supports, hangers and

appurtenances. Provide minimum 5 mils dry film thickness. 3. Paint ductwork flat black that are visible behind air outlets and inlets. 4. Paint all exposed and rooftop ductwork, roof mounted mechanical equipment, ductwork

supports, hangers and appurtenances. 5. Paint shall be a high performance polyurethane enamel coating system.

a. Acceptable paint manufacturers include Ameron, Tnemec or engineer approved equal.

b. Acceptable primer manufacturers include Ameron Amershield VOC, Tnemec's Series 1075 (1074) Endura-Shield, semi-gloss (gloss) sheen or equal.

c. Provide minimum 5 mils dry film thickness.

END OF SECTION 230000


SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - 1

SECTION 230517 – SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeve-seal systems. 2. Sleeve-seal fittings. 3. Grout.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. The manufacturer, contractor or supplier shall resubmit the specification section and shall include a written statement that the submitted equipment, hardware or accessory complies with the requirement of that particular section. Next to each specification item, indicate the following: 1. “No Exception Taken”. 2. “Exception”. All exceptions shall be clearly identified by referencing respective paragraph

and other requirements along with proposed alternative.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Metraflex Company (The). 3. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber for pipelines temperature up to 250 deg F and silicon (for

pipeline temperature up to 400 deg F interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Plastic to be chosen for pipeline temperature. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456811680&mf=04&src=wd





2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Presealed Systems. 2. Approved Equal

B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.3 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.




3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications: 1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Sleeve-seal fittings. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system. 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and

sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Sleeve-seal fittings. 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and

sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

4. Interior Partitions: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.


Project No: 7902 Buildings 3000 September 2, 2015 Fullerton College

ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518 - 1

SECTION 230518 – ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With rough-brass finish and with concealed hinge and setscrew.

E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.


ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening. 1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-

steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,

chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate,

stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening. 1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.



METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 – 1

SECTION 230519 – METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Thermometers. 2. Thermowells. 3. Dial-type pressure gages. 4. Gage attachments. 5. Test plugs. 6. Test-plug kits.





C. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Select gages such that the high limit of range does not exceed a factor of 1.5x the standard



operating point for that particular system.

B. Select gages so that system operating pressure is found within the middle 1/3 of overall range.

2.2 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ashcroft Inc, Model 50-EL-60-E Series 2. Trerice, H. O. Co. 3. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 4. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: Silicone liquid-filled and sealed; stainless steel Type 304 with 5-inch nominal diameter.

D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F and deg C.

E. Connector Type): Union joint, adjustable angle or everyangle, with unified-inch screw threads.

F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

G. Stem: 1. Diameter shall be 0.25 inch. 2. Stainless steel, Type 304. 3. Length based on pipe requirements.

H. Window: Durable polycarbonate.

I. Ring: Stainless steel.

J. Element: Bimetal coil.

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells: 1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer






connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.4 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Trerice, H. O. Co. d. Weiss Instruments, Inc. e. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Glycerin liquid filled, hermetically sealed, solid-front, pressure relief type; stainless

steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet

type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass. 10. Ring: Stainless steel. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

B. Remote-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable

product by one of the following:

a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Trerice, H. O. Co. d. Weiss Instruments, Inc. e. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.

3. Standard: ASME B40.100. 4. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type; cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal

diameter with back flange and holes for panel mounting. 5. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 6. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet

type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 7. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 8. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. 9. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 10. Window: Glass. 11. Ring: Stainless steel. 12. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.5 TEST PLUG

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the



following. 1. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 3. Trerice, H.O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS ¼ or NPS ½, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 275 °F.

F. Core Inserts: Nordel (Ethylene-Propylene self sealing rubber).

2.6 TEST-PLUG KITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 3. Trerice, H.O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Furnish one test-plug kit containing two thermometers, one pressure gage and adapter and carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

C. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1-2-inch diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 °F.

D. Pressure Gage: Small, bourdon-tube insertion type with 2 to 3 inch diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig.

E. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.

2.7 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/4 pipe threads.

C. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

H. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

J. Install test plugs in piping tees.

K. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.

L. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.

N. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.

O. Install thermometers and pressure gages in the following locations: 1. Inlet and outlet of cold side and hot side of all heat exchangers. 2. Inlet and outlet of all hydronic coil. 3. Suction and discharge of each pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.



3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of heat exchangers, pumps, PCW utility boxes or hydronic equipment shall be digital vari-angle type.

B. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers must read in middle 1/3 during normal operating temperature.

B. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 °F or as indicated on Chilled Water Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams.

C. Scale Range for Heating Hot Water Piping: 0 to 200 °F or as indicated on Heating Hot Water Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams.

D. Scale Range for Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: 30 to 240 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages must read in middle 1/3 during normal operating pressure.

B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of heat exchangers, pumps, PCW utility boxesor hydronic equipment shall be the following: 1. Solid-front, pressure-relief, direct-mounted, metal case. 2. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

C. Pressure gages at discharge of each pressure-reducing valve shall be the following: 1. Solid-front, pressure-relief, direct-mounted, metal case.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled Water Piping: 0 to 75 psi.

B. Scale Range for Heating Hot Water Piping: 0 to 75 psi.



GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 1

SECTION 230523 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Iron ball valves. 3. Butterfly valves high-performance. 4. Bronze lift check valves. 5. Iron, center-guided check valves. 6. Bronze gate valves. 7. Bronze globe valves.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 0553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.




B. Product Data: 1. For each type of valve indicated.



2. Provide AWWA C504 compliance affidavit for below grade butterfly valves.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 4. AWWA C504-87for rubber seated butterfly valves.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger. 2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller. 4. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size

and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and



protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections: 1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES (SIZES 1/2 THROUGH 2-1/2 INCH):

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig . c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. g. Stem: Stainless steel. h. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. i. Port: Full.

2.3 IRON BALL VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. Kitz Corporation. d. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-72. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Split body. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. g. Stem: Stainless steel. h. Ball: Stainless steel.

2.4 PORT: FULL.BUTTERFLY VALVES HIGH-PERFORMANCE (SIZE 3 INCH AND LARGER):

A. Class 150, Single-Flange, Butterfly Valves High-Performance:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6023&mf=04&src=wd








1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. b. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation. c. Nibco, Inc. d. Tyco Valves & Controls; a unit of Tyco Flow Control.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-68. b. CWP Rating: 285 psig at 100 deg F. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure

without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: Carbon steel, or ductile iron. e. Seat: Reinforced PTFE or metal. f. Stem: Stainless steel; offset from seat plane. g. Disc: Carbon steel. h. Service: Bidirectional.

B. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Flo Fab Inc. b. Hammond Valve. c. Kitz Corporation. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation. f. NIBCO INC. g. Red-White Valve Corporation. h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Vertical flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: NBR, PTFE, or TFE.

2.5 IRON, CENTER-GUIDED CHECK VALVES (SIZE 3 INCH AND LARGER):

A. Class 125, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company b. Muller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation c. Nibco, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-125 b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380kPa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Style: Globe, spring loaded f. Seat: Bronze g. Spring: Stainless Steel












PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install chainwheels on operators for butterfly and gate valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly. 2. High Performance Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. 3. Throttling Service: ball, or high performance butterfly valves. 4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze lift check valve, two-piece body with female threaded NPT ends, stainless steel spring and Teflon seat.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron center-guided, metal-seat check valves.



B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below. 3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.5 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 150 bronze disc. 3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim. 4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, RS.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged

ends. 2. Iron Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 10: Class 150. 3. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: Class 150, single flange.

3.6 CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded

ends. 2. Ball Valves: One piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass trim. 3. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS, bronze.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged

ends. 2. Iron Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 10: Class 150. 3. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: Class 150, single flange. 4. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 125, globe, seat. 5. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS. 6. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 – 1

SECTION 230529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Pipe stands. 6. Piping supports.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined

weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components. 3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.


A. The manufacturer, contractor or supplier shall resubmit the specification section and shall include a written statement that the submitted equipment, hardware or accessory complies with the requirement of that particular section. Next to each specification item, indicate the following: 1. “No Exception Taken”.



2. “Exception”. All exceptions shall be clearly identified by referencing respective paragraph and other requirements along with proposed alternative.


C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Pipe stands. 3. Equipment supports.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support

bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from



structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturer shall be Hilti only.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type,zinc-coated or stainless-steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturer shall be Hilti only.

2.5 PIPE STANDS

A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop or field fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: 1. Descriptions: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for

roof installation without membrane penetration. 2. Base: Plastic 3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-thread

rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-

steel, roller-type pipe support.



E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: 1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for

roof installation without membrane penetration. 2. Bases: One or more; plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports; Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

F. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Shop or field fabricated pipe supports made form structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.

2.6 PIPING SUPPORTS - ROOF PIPE

A. Manufacturer 1. PHP

B. Applications 1. General:

a. Support pipes at minimum 12 inches above roof surface. b. Piping support spacing shall not to exceed 10 ft. c. Design Criteria: Load roof surface at no more than 2 pounds per square inch.

2. Attachment requirements: a. Provide structural pier at roof framing system through roof. b. Roofing system shall be properly sealed at structural pier penetration. No roof

penetration shall occur at pipe support base system. c. Support framing system to be positively attached to structural pier through use of

steel cabling system.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.



1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than

4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Installer should be certified by Powder Actuated Tool Manufacturer.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

G. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

H. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

K. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution

plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution

plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.



d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 : 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting," Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and Section 099600 "High Performance Coatings."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in



piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS if little or

no insulation is required. 3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 5. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary

pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 6. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes

NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 9. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 10. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 11. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction. 12. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 13. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

14. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to



NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe

hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles. 3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 4. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 5. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 6. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge. 7. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 8. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads. 9. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 10. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural

steel. 11. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by

using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb .

12. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 13. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited. 14. Installer should be certified by Powder Actuated Tool Manufacturer.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation

that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to

prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal



expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor

to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

9. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

10. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

11. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

3.6 SUPPORT SPACING AND HANGER ROD DIAMETER SCHEDULE

MAXIMUM HANGER SUPPORT ROD PIPE SIZE SPACING DIAMETER (Inches) (Feet) (Inches)

Steel (sched 40)

1/2 6 3/8 3/4 to 1 8 3/8 1-1/4 to 2 10 3/8 2-1/2 to 3 10 1/2 4 to 6 14 5/8

Copper Type L

1/2 to 3/4 5 3/8 1 to 1-1/4 6 3/8 1-1/2 to 2 8 3/8 2-1/2 9 1/2 3 10 1/2 4 to 6 12 5/8

C.I. No-Hub and at Joints

1-1/2 to 2 8 3/8 2-1/2 to 3 8 1/2 4 to 6 8 5/8



VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 230548 – 1

SECTION 230548 - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. All general conditions and supplementary general conditions apply to the work of this section. Provide and perform the vibration isolation work as indicated, specified, and required by all applicable local and State Codes.

B. Principal items of work include the following, as outlined in the schedule: 1. All seismic restraints 2. All vibration isolators 3. All vibration isolation frames and brackets 4. Flexible pipe connections and couplings 5. All leveling valves and supplementary piping for air spring isolators 6. Galvanized steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.

C. Related Work Not Included in this Section. 1. Flexible electrical connections to all motors 2. Pipe clamps and hanger rods 3. Canvas connections

D. Operating Conditions: 1. Seismic restraints specified in this section are provided to resist equipment and pipe

movement and loads occurring as a result of an earthquake or other seismic event. All equipment and piping shall be provided with seismic restraints in accordance with the Seismic Hazard Level of the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual and CBC 2013, Earthquake Design: a. SMACNA Seismic Hazard Level (SHL): A b. Near-Source Factor (Na) 1.5 c. SMACNA Connection Level: 3 d. Seismic Zone Factor from UBC Table No. 16-I (Z): 0.4 e. Importance Factor from UBC Table No. 16-K (I): 1.0 f. Numerical Coefficient from Table No. 16-N (Cp): 1.5 g. Horizontal Force Factor (UBC Table 16-O (aP)) 2.5 h. Horizontal Force Factor (UBC Table 16-O (RP)) 3.0 i. Seismic Coefficient (Ca) 0.32Na-0.44Na

1.3 SUBMITTALS





B. Refer to general conditions for requirements pertaining to submittals, including preparation and transmittals. The submittal shall contain the following information: 1. Catalog cuts and data sheets on specific vibration isolators to be utilized, showing

compliance with the specification. 2. A list showing the equipment and piping to be isolated, the isolator type and model

number selected, isolator loading, the actual deflection, isolator free height and installed height. The list must also reference a specific drawing showing frame construction when applicable. For steel spring isolators include solid height and diameter of spring coil.

3. Test data showing force/displacement, fittings, material, live lengths, number of corrugations per foot and safety factor at pressure ratings for flexible stainless steel hoses and rubber pipe connections.

4. Drawings showing equipment frame construction for each item of equipment, including dimensions, structural member sizes, support point locations, etc.

5. Written instructions from the vibration isolation manufacturer as to the proper installation and adjustment of vibration isolation devices and seismic restraints.

6. Written approval of the frame design to be used, obtained from the manufacturer. 7. Drawings showing methods for suspension, support, guides, etc., for piping and

ductwork, etc. 8. Drawings showing methods for isolation of pipes, and penetration of walls, slabs, beams. 9. Seismic restraint requirements including:

a. Specific details for restraints including anchor bolts for mounting, snubbers, cable size, and the maximum loading at each location.

b. Method of attachment to piping, mechanical equipment, and structure. c. Seismic restraint calculations for all restraints performed and signed by an

engineer licensed in the state in which the work is to take place. d. Number and location of seismic restraints for each piece of equipment.

10. Final inspection and report.

1.4 RESPONSIBILITY OF MANUFACTURER.

A. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall have the following responsibilities: 1. Determine vibration isolation sizes and locations. 2. Provide piping and equipment isolation system as scheduled or specified. 3. Guarantee specified isolation system deflection. 4. Provide installation instructions and drawings. 5. Provide calculations by a Structural Engineer licensed in the state in which the work is to

take place or a certified test substantiating seismic restraint capability to safely accept specified external forces without failure and to maintain equipment in captive position. Snubber shall be capable of withstanding twice the design load without any obvious deformation.

6. Provide approved resilient restraining devices as required to limit equipment and piping motion in excess of 3/8 inch.

7. For all calculations on the seismic snubbers, provide the signature of a Structural Engineer who is licensed in the state in which the work is to take place.

8. Provide final inspection report in accordance with submittal requirements of seismic restraints and vibration isolation. The report shall be signed by the engineer who signed the calculations.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Isolation Technology, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Mason Industries. 6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 7. Vibration Isolation. 8. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place concrete. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch

clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.

a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation

mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. 4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and

anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer.

5. The isolators should have a reserve load capacity of at least 50% of the design load. 6. All isolators should have a loaded height/diameter ratio of 0.8 or less.

2.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. General 1. Seismic restraint shall be in accordance with all relevant State and Local code

requirements. 2. Restrain all equipment, piping and ductwork to resist a lateral force loading of not less

than 0.5 G for rigid mounting and 1.0G for flexible mounting.

B. Equipment Not Vibration-Isolated: 1. Attach to the structure with attachments capable of resisting the forces resulting from the

loading specified in Paragraph 1.4 above.

C. Vibration-Isolated Equipment: 1. Mount all vibration-isolated equipment on rigid steel frames as described in the vibration

control specifications unless the equipment manufacturer certifies direct attachment capability.

2. Each vibration-isolated frame shall have a minimum of four all directional seismic snubbers that are double acting and located as close to the vibration isolators as possible to facilitate attachment to the base and the structure.

3. The snubber shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by snubbing material made of bridge bearing neoprene.

4. The snubbers shall contain an elastomeric one piece bushing that is replaceable and a minimum of 1/4-inch thick. Snubbers shall be manufactured with an air gap between hard











and resilient material of not less than 1/8 inch or more than 1/4-inch. Shim snubbers as required to maintain clearances.

5. The snubber end cap shall be removable for inspection of snubber internal clearances. 6. The neoprene bushing shall be capable of rotation to verify that no short circuiting of the

vibration isolator exists.

D. Seismic Restraint of Vibration-Isolated Suspended Piping: 1. Use a slack cable system consisting of steel air craft cable of a minimum diameter of 1/8-

inch of steel at a minimum of 40 feet on center. 2. Cables shall be pre-stretched to establish a certified minimum modulus of elasticity. 3. Provide restraints for all trapeze-mounted piping where the combined weight of all piping

is greater than or equal to 5 pounds per foot. Where trapeze-mounted piping is not seismically restrained, provide flexible connections between equipment and piping.

4. Provide restraints for all piping 1-1/4 inch and larger located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment rooms and refrigeration machinery rooms.

5. Provide restraints for all fuel gas and compressed air piping 1 inch and larger. 6. Submittal drawing shall indicate proposed method of vertical restraint. 7. Cable shall be installed with sufficient slack to avoid short circuiting the vibration isolation.

E. Piping and Ductwork Rigidly Supported: 1. Support all piping and ductwork systems per the most recent volume of SMACNA

"Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems".

2. Provide restraints for all trapeze-mounted piping where the combined weight of all piping is greater than or equal to 5 pounds per foot. Where trapeze-mounted piping is not seismically restrained, provide flexible connections between equipment and piping.

3. Provide restraints for all piping 1-1/4 inch and larger located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment rooms and refrigeration machinery rooms.

F. Suspended Vibration-Isolated Equipment: 1. Utilize a slack cable restraint system. 2. Submittal drawing shall indicate proposed method of vertical restraint. 3. Cables shall be installed with sufficient slack to avoid short-circuiting the vibration

isolation.

G. Pipe Seismic Joint: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Ebaa Iron Model Force Balanced Flex-Tend b. Metraflex

2. Flexible expansion joints shall be installed on: a. Chilled and heating hot water pipes from Bridge Central Plant to Buildings L201

and L202. 3. Flexible expansion joint manufactured of ductile iron conforming to the material

requirements of ASTM A536 and ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. 4. Flexible expansion joint shall be pressure tested prior to shipment against it’s own

restraint to a minimum of 250 PSI. A minimum 2:1 safety factor, determined from the published pressure rating, shall apply.

5. Flexible expansion joint shall consist of an expansion joint designed and cast as an integral part of a ball and socket type flexible joint, having a minimum per ball deflection of: a. 25º or approximately 9-inches and 6-inches minimum expansion. b. Flexible expansion fitting shall not expand or exert an axial imparting thrust under

internal water pressure. c. Flexible expansion fitting shall not increase or decrease the internal water volume

as the unit expands or contracts. 6. All internal surfaces (wetted parts) shall be lined with a minimum of 15 mils of fusion



bonded epoxy conforming to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C213. Sealing gaskets shall be constructed of EPDM. The coating and gaskets shall meet ANSI/NSF-61.

7. Exterior surfaces shall be coated with a minimum of 6 mils of fusion bonded epoxy conforming to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C116/A21.16.

8. Flexible expansion joint shall be field insulated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The contractor shall bring to the Owner Representative's attention prior to installation any conflicts with other trades which will result in unavoidable contact to the isolated equipment and piping described herein. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible contractor's expense.

B. Bring to the Owner Representative's attention any discrepancies between the specifications and field conditions, changes required due to specific equipment selection, etc., prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the contractor's expense.

C. Obtain inspection and approval from the Owner Representative of any installation to be covered or enclosed prior to such closure.

D. Notify the Owner Representative prior to the general installation of vibration isolation devices so that the vibration isolator manufacturer can instruct and demonstrate the technique of proper installation with the contractor's foremen.

E. Coordinate his work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. He shall inform other trades following his work, such as plastering or electrical, to avoid any contact which would reduce the vibration isolation.

F. Transmission of perceptible vibration or structure borne noise to occupied area by equipment installed under this Contract will not be permitted.

G. All vibration isolation devices, including auxiliary steel bases and pouring forms, shall be designed and furnished by a single manufacturer, or supplier, who will be responsible for adequate coordination of all phases of this work.

H. The vibration isolation manufacturer, or his representative, shall be responsible for providing such supervision as may be necessary to assure correct installation and adjustment of the isolators. Upon completion of the installation and after the system is put into operation, the manufacturer, or his representative, shall make a final inspection and submit his report to the Owner Representative in writing, certifying the correctness of installation and compliance with approved submittal data.

I. Provide access doors for all vibration isolators and snubbers if located above inaccessible ceilings or in shafts.

J. Provide a maximum of four vibration isolators located at the corners of the equipment unless approval is obtained for additional isolators.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES



A. The equipment to be isolated shall be supported by a structural steel frame or by brackets attached directly to the machine where no frame is required.

B. Brackets shall be provided to accommodate the isolator and provide a mechanical stop as shown on the drawings. The vertical position and size of the bracket shall be specified by the isolator manufacturer.

C. The frame shall be placed in position and supported temporarily by 1 inch shims prior to the installation of the machine or isolators.

D. After the entire system installation is completed and under full operational load, the isolator shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from the shims to the isolator. When all isolators are properly adjusted, the shims will be barely free and shall be removed. Thereafter, the shims shall be used as a gauge to check that the 1-inch clearance is maintained so that the system will remain free of stress.

3.3 PIPING ISOLATOR INSTALLATION HORIZONTALLY SUPPORTED PIPING

A. The isolators shall be installed with the isolator hanger box as close as possible to the structure.

B. The isolators shall be suspended from beams, never from slab diaphragms between beams.

C. Hanger rods shall be aligned to clear the hanger box and be plumb.

D. Load transfer isolators, when utilized, shall temporarily maintain the piping in a rigid position until installation is complete and fully loaded.

3.4 PIPING ISOLATOR INSTALLATION VERTICAL RISERS

A. Vertical pipe risers shall be fully isolated, guided by telescoping acoustical pipe guides and anchored by all directional acoustical pipe anchors. Auxiliary steel beams shall be provided as required.

B. Maximum load change on any support shall be limited to 25% of the initial load.

C. Guides and anchors shall be selected to provide restraint of horizontal pipe motion and be capable of supporting the full weight of the pipe and its water.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. Equipment 1. All seismic restraints must be installed and adjusted so that the equipment and piping

vibration isolation is not degraded by utilization of the restraints. 2. Install cables so they do not bed across edges of adjacent equipment or building

structure. 3. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted and wall mounted

equipment. 4. If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at

upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. 5. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for

anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and



telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 6. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full

design strength. 7. Set anchors to manufacturer’s recommended torque using a torque wrench. 8. All seismic restraints shall be anchored in place with equipment in operation for proper

operating clearances.

B. Piping 1. Seismic restraint spacing shall be in accordance with hanger spacing. 2. Comply with requirements in Manufacturer’s Standardization Society SP-127. 3. Provide seismic restraint for all piping in equipment rooms, in shafts, and in ceilings of

occupied spaces. 4. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. 5. Comply with SMACNA, NFPA Pamphlet 13 and State Building Code Guidelines. 6. Compensate for thermal movement in the piping systems.


Project No: 7902 Building 3000 eptember 4, 2016 Fullerton College

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 – 1

SECTION 230553 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: This section specifies mechanical identification for equipment and piping systems specified in Division 23.

B. The following are included: 1. Nameplates. 2. Tags. 3. Stencils. 4. Pipe Markers.


A. References: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. MIL-STD-810C Environmental Test Methods.


A. Submit under provisions of Section 230000.

B. Record actual locations of tagged valves on Record Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Seton Name Plate Company, Inc.

B. Marking Services, Inc.

C. WH Brady Company

2.2 NAMEPLATES

A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved white letters on black background color.



2.3 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.

B. Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:

3/4 to 1-1/4 inch O.D. of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2 inch high letters. 1-1/2 to 2 inch O.D. of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 3/4 inch high letters. 2-1/2 to 6 inch O.D. of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1-1/4 inch high

letters. 8 to 30 inch O.D. of Insulation or Pipe: 24 inch long color field, 2-1/2 inch high

letters. Over 10 inch O.D. of Insulation or Pipe: 32 inch long color field, 3-1/2 inch high

letters. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters.

B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Division 1, semi- gloss enamel, colors conforming to ANSI A13.1 unless otherwise specified.

2.5 PIPE MARKERS

A. Plastic markers for coding pipe shall conform to ANSI A13.1. Markers for pipes 8-inch and smaller shall be the mechanically attached type that are easily removable and firmly attached; markers for pipe sizes 10-inch and larger shall be the adhesive applied type. Markers shall consist of pressure sensitive legends applied to plastic backing, which is strapped or otherwise mechanically attached to the pipe. Legend and backing shall be resistant to petroleum based oils and grease and shall meet criteria for humidity, solar radiation, rain, salt, fog and leakage fungus, as specified by MIL-STD-810C. Markers shall withstand a continuous operating temperature range of -40°F to 180°F. Plastic coding markers shall not be the individual letter type but shall be manufactured and applied in one continuous length of plastic.

B. Markers bearing the legends on the background colors specified in Section 15060 shall be provided in the following letter heights:

Outside Pipe Diameter*, Inches Letter Height, Inches Less than 1-1/2 1/2 1-1/2 through 3 1-1/8 Greater than 3 2-1/4 * Outside pipe diameter shall include insulation and jacketing In addition, pipe markers shall include uni- and bidirectional arrows in the same sizes as the legend. Legends and arrows shall be white on blue or red backgrounds and black on other specified backgrounds.

C. Tracer tape shall be 6 inches wide, colored the same as the background colors as specified in Section 15060, and made of inert plastic material suitable for direct burial. Tape shall be capable of stretching to twice its original length.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Division 9 for stencil painting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Division 9.

D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade directly above buried pipe.

G. Identify major mechanical equipment, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.

H. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

I. Identify room sensors relating to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.

J. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

K. Tag automatic controls, instruments, sensors, and relays. Key to control schematic.

L. Identify piping concealed or exposed, including valve pits, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

M. Provide each hose bibb with a red plastic laminate sign stating, ”DANGER - UNSAFE WATER”. The sign shall be mounted within 12” of the hose bibb outlet.



TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes: A. TAB will be responsible to carry out the commissioning requirements specified in Section

15995, 01810 and other sections referenced in Section 01810. B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. C. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic and refrigerating systems. D. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. E. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions. F. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions. G. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. H. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. References: This section contains references to the following standards for manufacturer and

installation requirements. They are part of this section in their entirety or as specifically modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and following listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

AABC National Standards For Total System Balance. ADC Test Code For Grilles, Registers, And Diffusers. NEBB Procedural Standards For Testing, Adjusting, And

Balancing Of Environmental Systems.

B. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.

C. Independent Agency: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems

specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience certified by AABC. D. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer experienced in

performance of this Work and licensed in the State of California.

E. The Contractor will provide the services of a qualified test and balance contractor. The qualifications of the TAB contracting firm shall be submitted, along with the specific qualifications of the lead site technician who will remain on site during all TAB work, within 60



days of notice to proceed. Recent projects shall be listed and described for both the company and the lead technician. Names and telephone numbers of the project contractors and facility managers will be provided.

F. The Owner must approve in writing the qualifications of both the company and the lead technician.

G. Sequencing:

1. Sequence work under the provisions of Division 1. 2. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of

work before Substantial Completion of Project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of paragraph 230000. B. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of

Contract. C. Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Division 1. D. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting,

and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. E. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and

equipment data required. F. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies

for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. G. Provide reports in binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover

identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating sensor locations.

H. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC National Project

Performance Guaranty prior to commencing system balance. F. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms or

NEBB forms. Forms shall contain information indicated in Schedules.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have

been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – (NOT USED)



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 AGENCIES

A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

C. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1.

E. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine system and equipment test reports.

I. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

J. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

K. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.



L. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

M. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.

N. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

O. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

P. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

Q. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

R. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.

S. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.

T. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in fan coil units, air handling units, etc.

U. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.

V. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.

W. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.

X. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.

Y. Controller set points are set at indicated values.

Z. Interlocked systems are operating.

AA. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.

BB. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent system balance.

CC. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.3 PREPARATION A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make

instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing. B. Provide additional balancing devices as required. C. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.



5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and

plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to

space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

3.5 ADJUSTING A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings

to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such

disruption has been rectified. D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing

doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or

areas as selected and witnessed by the Architect. F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.

3.6 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and

exhaust air quantities. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of

duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts

and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not

create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters.



F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required.

Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or

inlet. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure

drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design

conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check

leakage.

3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end

of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the

general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set

at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so

motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read

pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake



horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated pre-settings.

C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

D. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

E. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.

F. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

G. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.

H. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow.

I. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

J. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

K. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.

B. Balancing valves and associated balancing shall not be required on devices where pressure independent control valves are installed. Balancing valves and balancing are required if self-contained pressure independent control valves are not installed.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop.

B. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.



3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.

3.11 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

C. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

D. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings

and Product Data.

E. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

1.) Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 2.) Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 3.) Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from

indicated values. 4.) Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

d. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. e. Conditions of filters. f. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. g. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. h. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. i. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

F. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:



1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Balancing stations. 6. Position of balancing devices.

3.12 SCHEDULES

A. Report Forms: Agency shall compile the following data as outlined below: 1. Title Page:

a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor i. Project altitude j. Report date

2. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system c. Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building

pressurization e. Nomenclature used throughout report f. Test conditions

3. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date g. Refrigerant high-pressure-cutoff set point in psig.

B. Primary Water Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 1. Entering-water temperature in deg F. 2. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. 3. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. 4. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. 5. Water flow rate in gpm.

C. Secondary Water Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 1. Entering-water temperature in deg F. 2. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. 3. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. 4. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. 5. Water flow rate in gpm.

D. Electric Motors:



1. Manufacturer 2. Model/Frame 3. HP/BHP 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load RPM 5. Service factor 6. Starter size, rating, heater elements 7. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

E. Air Moving Equipment 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge 6. Air flow, specified and actual 7. Return air flow, specified and actual 8. Outside air flow, specified and actual 9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 10. Inlet pressure 11. Discharge pressure 12. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 13. Number of Belts/Make/Size 14. Fan RPM

F. Return Air/Outside Air Data: 1. Identification/location 2. Design air flow 3. Actual air flow 4. Design return air flow 5. Actual return air flow 6. Design outside air flow 7. Actual outside air flow 8. Return air temperature 9. Outside air temperature 10. Required mixed air temperature 11. Actual mixed air temperature 12. Design outside/return air ratio 13. Actual outside/return air ratio

G. Exhaust Fan Data: 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Air flow, specified and actual 6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 7. Inlet pressure 8. Discharge pressure 9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 10. Number of Belts/Make/Size 11. Fan RPM

H. Duct Traverse: 1. System zone/branch



2. Duct size 3. Area 4. Design velocity 5. Design air flow 6. Test velocity 7. Test air flow 8. Duct static pressure 9. Air temperature 10. Air correction factor

I. Air Distribution Test Sheet: 1. Air terminal number 2. Room number/location 3. Area factor 4. Design velocity 5. Design air flow 6. Test (final) velocity 7. Test (final) air flow 8. Percent of design air flow

J. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting and Balancing:

Equipment Air Balance Water Balance

Air Handling Units X X

Fan Coil Units X X

Exhaust Fans X

Air Filters X

Air Inlets and Outlets X X



DUCTWORK INSULATION 230713 - 1

SECTION 230713 - DUCTWORK INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies insulation used on ductwork and plenums.



ASC-A-7001C Adhesive and Sealant Council Standards for Adhesives for Duct Liner.

ASTM C518 Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

ASTM C553 Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation. ASTM 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. SMACNA DCS SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Title 24 Part ^ California Energy Code

B. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with UL 723 and UL790.

C. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience.

D. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.

E. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

F. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.

G. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE (INDOOR APPLICATION)

A. Manufacturers: Owens-Corning Fiberglass all-service faced duct wrap, Certainteed, Knauf, Manville or equal.



B. Insulation: Formaldehyde-free ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value : ASTM C518, 0.30 at 75∞F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250∞F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: <3% at 120∞F. 4. Density: 0.5 lb/cu ft.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

D. Vapor Barrier Tape 1. Manufacturers: Owens-Corning or equal (no known equal). 2. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure

sensitive rubber based adhesive.

E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.

2.2 GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, FLEXIBLE

A. Manufacturers: Johns-Manville Linacousticor equal (no known equal).

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket . 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value : ASTM C518-70, 0.24 at 75∞F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250∞F. 3. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft. 4. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4,000 ft/min.

C. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel with press-on head conforming to SMACNA.

D. Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers: Owens-Corning or equal (no known equal). 2. ASTM-C916 adhesive Waterproof fire-retardant type conforming to ASC-A-7001C.

2.3 FIBROUS GLASS BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Owens-Corning Aeroflex Duct Liner, Certainteed, Knauf, Manville or equal.

B. Insulation: fibrous glass board 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value : ASTM C518-70, 0.26 at 75∞F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250∞F. 3. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft. 4. Foil scrim-kraft facing, vapor sealed, finished with 0.016” aluminum weatherproof

jacketing 5. Thickness: 1” minimum

C. Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers: Owens-Corning or equal (no known equal). 2. Waterproof fire-retardant type conforming to ASC-A-7001C.

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Before applying ductwrap, verify surfaces are smooth, dry, clean, and free from dust, debris, or other loose materials. Ductwork shall be tightly sealed at all joints and seams. Surfaces must be dry before the application of the insulation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Deliver products to the job site in manufacturer’s original sealed containers with seals and labels intact. All materials shall be stored at job site, in an enclosed space, protected from excessive heat and cold, in accordance with material manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections,

and expansion joints.

D. Lined ductwork: 1. Fabricate in compliance with the latest edition of NAIMA's Fibrous Glass Duct Liner

Standard. 2. Liner shall be folded and compressed in the corners of rectangular duct sections or shall

be cut and fit to assure lapped, compressed joints. Longitudinal joints in duct liner should not occur except at the corners of the duct. Longitudinal joints in liner shall be coated with adhesive. All damaged areas of the air stream surface shall be repaired with an adhesive that conforms to ASTM C 916.

3. Liner should be adhered to the duct with 90% minimum area coverage of an adhesive that conforms to ASTM C 916.

4. Mechanical fasteners shall be located with respect to the interior duct dimensions, regardless of air flow direction.

5. Mechanical fasteners should not compress the insulation more than 1/8" (3 mm), and shall be installed perpendicular to the duct surface. All fasteners should comply with the guidelines of NAIMA's Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard.

6. Metal nosings shall be securely installed over transversely oriented liner edges facing the air stream at fan discharge, at access doors, and at any interval of lined duct preceeded by unlined duct. In addition, where velocities exceed 4000 fpm (1219 mpm), metal nosing shall be used on upstream edges of liner at every transverse joint.

7. All butt joints within 10’ of air handler and 5’ of VAV box shall be sealed with approved duct mastic.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing all protective covers, drops, and masking required to protect adjacent areas, equipment, utilities, parts, material, and other items from spills, mist, spray, etc.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of and repairing any damage caused by cleaning chemicals, gravel, dust, coating materials, etc. The contractor shall also be responsible for damage caused by workers, equipment, etc.



3.3 TOLERANCE

A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at normal conditions, as materials indicated.

3.4 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE - Wrapped

THICKNESS Installed DUCTWORK Inch R-value FINISH

Supply Ducts, Indoor 2” R8.0 Vapor Barrier in UnConditioned Spaces

Return Ducts, Indoor 2” R8.0 Vapor Barrier in UnConditioned Spaces Supply Ducts, in indirectly 1-1/2” R4.2 Vapor Barrier Conditioned spaces (RA Plenums) Return Duct in indirectly not required Conditioned spaces (RA Plenums) Exterior Ducts Not allowed – see Lined section

3.5 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE - Lined

THICKNESS DUCTWORK Inch R-Value

All interior Ducts and Plenums as 1.0 R4.2 Shown Lined on Drawings

(VAV Box Plenums and AHU Inlets and Outlets)

Exterior or ducts in unconditioned 2.0 R8.0 Space



INSULATION FOR EXPOSED PIPING & EQUIPMENT 230719 – 1

SECTION 230719 - INSULATION FOR EXPOSED PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: This section specifies insulation for exposed piping and related equipment and appurtenant surfaces.



Title 24 CEC 2013 California Energy Code ASTM B209 Aluminum ad Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. ASTM C533 Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. ASTM D1621 Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. ASTM D1056 Flexible Cellular Materials. ASTM C921 Jacketing Materials. ASTM C533 Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation. ASTM C612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Insulation. ASTM C449 Mineral Fiber Hydraulic Setting and Finishing Cement. ASTM C195 Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. ASTM C547 Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. ASTM C534 Performed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal

Insulation In Sheet and Tubular Form. ASTM C518 Steady State Heat Flux Measurements. ASTM C177 Steady State Heat Flux Measurements. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics. ASTM E96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. ASTM D2842 Water Vapor Transmission of Rigid Cellular Plastics. MICA National Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience.

C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.

D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

E Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.

F. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All glass fiber insulation shall have a maximum smoke and fire spread rating of 50’/25’ respectively. Piping insulation shall be tubular or the flexible blanket type. Insulation for valves, strainers, fittings, expansion joints, flanges and other connections shall be segmented sections, molded, or blanket type coverings of the specified type and thickness of pipe insulation, or the flexible blanket type. Equipment insulation shall be flexible blanket type or rigid board type cut to fit the surface.

2.2 GLASS FIBER

A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass 25 ASJ/SSL 2. Certainteed 3. Kanuf 4. Manville 5. Or equal (no known equal).

B. Insulation: ASTM C177; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C335, 0.23 at 75°F. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: -20°F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 850°F. 4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. ASTM C921, White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized

film. 2. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm inches. 3. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

D. Tie Wire: 18 gage stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.

E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers: Armstrong or equal (no known equal). 2. Compatible with insulation.

F. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. Manufacturers: Armstrong or equal (no known equal).. 2. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

G. Fibrous Glass Fabric: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq. yd weight. 2. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density.

H. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Manufacturers: Owens-Corning or equal (no known equal). 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.

I. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:



1. Manufacturers: Armstrong or equal (no known equal). 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.

J. Insulating Cement: 1. Manufacturers: Armstrong or equal (no known equal). 2. ASTM C449.

2.3 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE

A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens-Corning. 2. Certainteed 3. Kanuf 4. Manville 5. Or equal (no known equal).

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75°F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250°F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. 4. Density: 2.0 lb/cu ft density.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. ASTM C921, kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

D. Tie Wire: 18 gage stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.


F. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. Manufacturers: Armstrong or equal (no known equal). 2. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

2.4 GLASS FIBER, RIGID

A. Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville. 2. Certainteed 3. Knauf 4. Owens-Corning 5. Or equal (no known equal).

B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75°F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850°F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.1 percent by volume. 4. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft density.



C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

D. Facing: 1 inch galvanized steel hexagonal wire mesh stitched onto both faces of insulation.


F. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. Manufacturers: Armstrong or equal (no known equal).. 2. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

2.5 CELLULAR FOAM

A. Manufacturers: 1. Armaflex 2. Rubatex 3. Or equal (no known equal).

B. Insulation: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177 or C518; 0.28 at 75 °F. 2. Minimum service temperature: -40 °F. 3. Maximum service temperature: 220 °F. 4. Maximum moisture absorption: ASTM D1056; 3.0 percent (pipe) by volume, 6.0 percent

(sheet) by volume. 5. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.20 perm inches. 6. Maximum flame spread: ASTM E84; 25. 7. Maximum smoke developed: ASTM E84; 50. 8. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers: Armstrong 520 or equal (no known equal). 2. Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.

2.6 INSERTS

A. Polyurethane Rigid Foam Insulation: 1. Manufacturer:

a. Trymer 9501 b. Insul Therm c. Or equal (no known equal).

2. Insulation: a. Minimum Service Temperature: -320°F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 300°F. c. Moisture Absorption: ASTM D2842, .05 lb/ft2. d. “K” value: ASTM C518; 0.14 at 75°F. e. Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E-84; 20. f. Maximum Smoke Density: ASTM E-84; 50.



g. Compressive Strength: ASTM D-1621; 28 parallel, 20 perpendicular.

B. Hydrous Calcium Silicate: 1 Manufacturer:

a. Pabco Super Caltemp b. Johns Manville Thermo-12/Blue c. Or equal (no known equal).

2. Insulation: ASTM C533; rigid molded white; asbestos free. a. “K” value: ASTM C177 and C518; 0.40 at 300°F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 1,200°F. c. Density: 14 lb/cu. ft.

2.7 JACKETS

A. PVC Plastic: 1. Manufacturers for White PVC Jackets:

a. Proto Corp. LoSMOKE 20 b. Ceel-Co 550 c. Manville Zeston 2000 PVC d. Foster’s Speedline 25/50 e. Or equal (no known equal)

2. Jacket: ASTM C921, One piece molded type fitting covers and jacketing; high gloss white color unless otherwise indicated. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0°F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150°F. c. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm inches. d. Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84; 25. e. Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50. f. Thickness: 0.020 inch. g. Connections: Vapor seal mastic.

3. Covering Adhesive Mastic: a. Manufacturers: Manville Zeston Perma-Weld, Ceel-Co 300 or equal (no known

equal). b. Compatible with insulation and jacket.

B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 1. Fabric: ASTM C921, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant

lagging adhesive. 2. Lagging adhesive shall be compatible with insulation.

C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 1. Thickness: 0.020 inch sheet. 2. Finish: Ribbed. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. Fittings: 0.020 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 1/2 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



A. General: Insulation shall be applied over clean, dry surfaces. Double layout insulation, where specified or required to achieve the specified surface temperature, shall be provided with staggered section joints.

B. Pipe Supports and Shields: Unless otherwise specified, thermal pipe hanger shields shall be provided by the Contractor and installed during pipe support installation. Where thermal pipe hanger shields are used, apply the following to all butt joints: 1. On cold water or chilled water, the Contractor shall apply a wet coat of vapor barrier lap

cement on all butt joints and seal the joints with a minimum 3 inch wide vapor barrier tape or band.

C. Protection: Insulation and jackets shall be protected from crushing, denting, and similar damage during construction. Vapor barriers, shall not be penetrated or otherwise damaged. Insulation, jacket, and vapor barriers damaged during construction shall be removed and new material shall be installed.

D. Piping Insulation: 1. General:

a. Pipe: Piping shall be continuously insulated with Glass Fiber specified in paragraph 230719-2.02, along its entire length including in-line devices such as valves, fittings, flanges, couplings, strainers, suction diffusers, triple-duty valves and other piping appurtenances. Insulation shall be butted firmly together and jacket laps and joint strips provided with lap adhesive. Jackets shall be provided with their seams located on the topside of pipe for pipes located at least five feet above finished floor. Pipes located below five feet above finished floor shall be provided with their seams located on the bottomside of pipe. Removable flexible blanket-type insulation need not be jacketed. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hammers, and other pipe penetrations.

b. Fittings, Connections, Flanges and Valves: Fitting, connection, flange and valve insulation shall be insulated with Glass Fiber (Flexible or Rigid) specified in paragraph 230719-2.03 and 2.04, provided with jackets specified in paragraph 230719-2.07. Insulation shall be secured in place with 20-gage wire and a coat of insulating cement. Jackets shall be provided with their seams located on the underside of fittings and valves.

2. Insulated Cold Pipes Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperatures: a. Pipe: Insulation shall have ends sealed off with a vapor barrier coating. Inside

the Chiller Room insulation shall be covered with PVC jackets specified in paragraph 230719-2.07-A. Refer to MICA Plate No. 36.

b. Fittings, Connections, Flanges and Valves: Inside the Chiller Room insulation shall be provided with rigid PVC jackets specified in paragraph 230719-2.07-A. The ends of jackets shall be secured with PVC end caps. Vapor barrier shall not be penetrated. Refer to MICA Plate No 12 (Fittings) and No. 15 (valves). Covers shall be secured with adhesive.

3. Insulated Pipes Conveying Fluids Above Ambient Temperature: a. Pipe: Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory or field

applied. Inside the Chiller Room insulation shall be covered with PVC jackets specified in paragraph 230719-2.07-A. Refer to MICA Plate No. 36.

b. Fittings, Flanges, and Valves: Inside the Chiller Room insulation shall be covered with PVC jackets specified in paragraph 230719-2.07-A. The ends of jackets shall be secured with PVC end caps (trimmed away from valve stem). Refer to MICA Plate No 12 (fittings) and No. 15 (valves). Covers shall be secured with adhesive.

4. Outdoor Piping: a. Pipe: Rigid insulation shall be provided with aluminum jackets specified in

paragraph 230719-2.07-C unless otherwise indicated. Flexible blanket-type



insulation shall be designed for outdoor, weather-exposed service. Refer to MICA Plate No. 6.

b. Fittings, Connections, Flanges and Valves: Rigid insulation shall be provided with rigid aluminum covers specified in paragraph 230719-2.04-B. Flexible blanket-type insulation shall be designed for outdoor, weather-exposed service. Refer to MICA Plate No. 17 (fittings) and No 14 (valves).

5. Inserts and Shields: a. Inserts for piping conveying fluids below ambient temperature shall be

polyurethane as specified in paragraph 230719-2.06-A. b. Inserts for piping conveying fluids above ambient temperature shall be

polyurethane or calcium silicate as specified in paragraph 230719-2.06. c. Application: Piping 2” diameter or larger. d. Shields: Minimum 18ga. galvanized steel between hangers and inserts. e. Insert Location: Between support shield and equipment and under the finish

jacket. f. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6” long, of same thickness and contour as

adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 6. Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around such. 7. Install insulation for equipment requiring access for maintenance, repair, or cleaning in

such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage. 8. Insulate all chilled water system appurtenances so that no condensation forms, i.e., drain

lines, sensing lines, thermometer stems, chemical pot feeder lines, etc.

E. Mechanical Equipment Insulation: 1. General: Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall be Glass Fiber (Flexible or Rigid)

specified in paragraph 230719-2.03 and 2.04, and shall fit the contours of equipment and shall be secured with 1/2 by 0.015 inch stainless steel bands. Refer to MICA Plate No. 46. Weld pins or stick clips with washers may be used for flat surfaces and spaced a maximum 18 inches apart. Joints shall be staggered and voids filled with insulating cement. Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall be provided with canvas jackets specified in paragraph 230719-2.07-B. Unless specifically specified to be uninsulated, equipment connected to insulated piping shall be insulated.

2. Low Temperature Class: Insulation shall have joints, breaks, and punctures sealed in facing with fire-retardant vapor barrier adhesive reinforced with 4 inch tape. Insulation shall be provided with a layer of open-weave glass cloth embedded into a wet coat of fire-retardant adhesive. Seams shall overlap at least 2 inches. A finish coat of fire-retardant adhesive shall be provided.

F. Flashing: 1. Flashing shall be provided at jacket penetrations and terminations. Clearance for

flashing shall be provided between insulation system and supports. 2. A heavy tack coat of sealant shall be troweled over the insulation, extending over the

jacket edge 1 inch and over the pipe of protrusion 2 inches. Reinforcement shall be stretched over the tack coat after clipping to fit over pipe and jacket. Clipped reinforcing shall be strapped with a continuous band of reinforcing to prevent curling. Sealant shall be troweled over the reinforcement to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch.

3. Aluminum caps shall be formed to fit over the adjacent jacketing and to completely cover coated insulation. Cap shall be held in place with a jacket strap.



3.2 PIPING INSULATION

A. The insulation dimensional tolerances shall comply with the specified standards. Unless otherwise indicated, equipment insulation shall match thickness of attached piping. The minimum insulation thicknesses exclusive of jacket, and insulation jacket colors shall be as follows:

Piping Runouts Temperature 1” and 1.25” 2.50” 5” and 8” and PVC Jacket ServiceRange, oF Less to 2” to 4” 6” Larger Color CHWS 38-45 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 Gloss White CHWR 46-58 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 Gloss White Condensate Drains in Ceiling or Walls 55-65 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 *See specification Section 15060. *Glycol pipe equal to CHWS.

3.3 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water Systems 1. Pump Bodies 2 inches 2. Air Separator 2 inches 3. Expansion Tank 1 inch



DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923-1

SECTION 23 0923 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. DDC system for monitoring and controlling of HVAC systems. 2. Delivery of selected control devices to equipment and systems manufacturers for factory

installation and to HVAC systems installers for field installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem. A prescribed set of well-defined rules or processes for solving a problem in a finite number of steps.

B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or temperature.

C. BACnet Specific Definitions: 1. BACnet: Building Automation Control Network Protocol, ASHRAE 135. A

communications protocol allowing devices to communicate data over and services over a network.

2. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): BIBB defines a small portion of BACnet functionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBs are combined to build the BACnet functional requirements for a device.

3. BACnet/IP: Defines and allows using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number.

4. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL): Organization responsible for testing products for compliance with ASHRAE 135, operated under direction of BACnet International.

5. PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement): Written document that identifies the particular options specified by BACnet that are implemented in a device.

D. Binary: Two-state signal where a high signal level represents ON" or "OPEN" condition and a low signal level represents "OFF" or "CLOSED" condition. "Digital" is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary" to indicate a two-state signal.

E. Controller: Generic term for any standalone, microprocessor-based, digital controller residing on a network, used for local or global control. Three types of controllers are indicated: Network Controller, Programmable Application Controller, and Application-Specific Controller.

F. Control System Integrator: An entity that assists in expansion of existing enterprise system and support of additional operator interfaces to I/O being added to existing enterprise system.



G. COV: Changes of value.

H. DDC System Provider: Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer and responsible for execution of DDC system Work indicated.

I. Distributed Control: Processing of system data is decentralized and control decisions are made at subsystem level. System operational programs and information are provided to remote subsystems and status is reported back. On loss of communication, subsystems shall be capable of operating in a standalone mode using the last best available data.

J. DOCSIS: Data-Over Cable Service Interface Specifications.

K. E/P: Voltage to pneumatic.

L. Gateway: Bidirectional protocol translator that connects control systems that use different communication protocols.

M. HLC: Heavy load conditions.

N. I/O: System through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog input (AI), binary input (BI), analog output (AO) and binary output (BO). Analog signals are continuous and represent control influences such as flow, level, moisture, pressure, and temperature. Binary signals convert electronic signals to digital pulses (values) and generally represent two-position operating and alarm status. "Digital," (DI and (DO), is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary," (BI) and (BO), respectively.

O. I/P: Current to pneumatic.

P. LAN: Local area network.

Q. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

R. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing, IEE 8802-3. Datalink protocol LAN option that uses twisted-pair wire for low-speed communication.

S. MTBF: Mean time between failures.

T. Network Controller: Digital controller, which supports a family of programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers, that communicates on peer-to-peer network for transmission of global data.

U. Network Repeater: Device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts it to another network. No routing information is added to protocol.

V. PDA: Personal digital assistant.

W. Peer to Peer: Networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners.

X. POT: Portable operator's terminal.

Y. PUE: Performance usage effectiveness.

Z. RAM: Random access memory.



AA. RF: Radio frequency.

BB. Router: Device connecting two or more networks at network layer.

CC. Server: Computer used to maintain system configuration, historical and programming database.

DD. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.

EE. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

FF. USB: Universal Serial Bus.

GG. User Datagram Protocol (UDP): This protocol assumes that the IP is used as the underlying protocol.

HH. VAV: Variable air volume.

II. WLED: White light emitting diode.

1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the most restrictive of local, state, and federal authorities' codes and ordinances or these plans and specifications. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with the current editions in effect 30 days prior to the receipt of bids of the following codes: 1. National Electric Code (NEC) 2. International Building Code (IBC)

a. Section 719 Ducts and Air Transfer Openings b. Section 907 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems c. Section 909 Smoke Control Systems d. Chapter 28 Mechanical

3. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 4. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building

Automation and Control Systems


A. Schedules 1. Within one month of contract award, provide a schedule of the work indicating the

following: a. Intended sequence of work items b. Start date of each work item c. Duration of each work item d. Planned delivery dates for ordered material and equipment and expected lead

times e. Milestones indicating possible restraints on work by other trades or situations

2. Monthly written status reports indicating work completed and revisions to expected delivery dates. Include updated schedule of work.

B. Multiple Submissions: 1. If multiple submissions are required to execute work within schedule, first submit a

coordinated schedule clearly defining intent of multiple submissions. Include a proposed



date of each submission with a detailed description of submittal content to be included in each submission.

2. Clearly identify each submittal requirement indicated and in which submission the information will be provided.

3. Include an updated schedule in each subsequent submission with changes highlighted to easily track the changes made to previous submitted schedule.

C. Product Data: For each type of product include the following: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes. 2. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories indicating

process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including temperature and humidity.

3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product specification sheets.

4. Installation, operation and maintenance instructions including factors effecting performance.

5. Bill of materials of indicating quantity, manufacturer, and extended model number for each unique product. a. Operator workstations. b. Servers. c. Printers. d. Gateways. e. Routers. f. Protocol analyzers. g. DDC controllers. h. Enclosures. i. Electrical power devices. j. UPS units. k. Accessories. l. Instruments. m. Control dampers and actuators. n. Control valves and actuators.

6. When manufacturer's product datasheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product model, clearly indicate and highlight only applicable information.

7. Each submitted piece of product literature shall clearly cross reference specification and drawings that submittal is to cover.

D. Software Submittal: 1. Cross-referenced listing of software to be loaded on each operator workstation, server,

gateway, and DDC controller. 2. Description and technical data of all software provided, and cross-referenced to products

in which software will be installed. 3. Operating system software, operator interface and programming software, color graphic

software, DDC controller software, maintenance management software, and third-party software.

4. Include a flow diagram and an outline of each subroutine that indicates each program variable name and units of measure.

5. Listing and description of each engineering equation used with reference source. 6. Listing and description of each constant used in engineering equations and a reference

source to prove origin of each constant. 7. Description of operator interface to alphanumeric and graphic programming. 8. Description of each network communication protocol.



9. Description of system database, including all data included in database, database capacity and limitations to expand database.

10. Description of each application program and device drivers to be generated, including specific information on data acquisition and control strategies showing their relationship to system timing, speed, processing burden and system throughout.

11. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.

E. Shop Drawings: 1. General Requirements:

a. Include cover drawing with Project name, location, Owner, Architect, Contractor and issue date with each Shop Drawings submission.

b. Include a drawing index sheet listing each drawing number and title that matches information in each title block.

c. Prepare Drawings using CAD. d. Drawings Size: 11”x17”

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details where applicable. 3. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

4. Detail means of vibration isolation and show attachments to rotating equipment. 5. Plan Drawings indicating the following:

a. Screened backgrounds of walls, structural grid lines, HVAC equipment, ductwork and piping.

b. Room names and numbers with coordinated placement to avoid interference with control products indicated.

c. Each desktop operator workstation, server, gateway, router, DDC controller, control panel instrument connecting to DDC controller, and damper and valve connecting to DDC controller, if included in Project.

d. Exact placement of products in rooms, ducts, and piping to reflect proposed installed condition.

e. Network communication cable and raceway routing. f. Proposed routing of wiring, cabling, conduit, and tubing, coordinated with building

services for review before installation. 6. Schematic drawings for each controlled HVAC system indicating the following:

a. I/O points labeled with point names shown. Indicate instrument range, normal operating set points, and alarm set points. Indicate fail position of each damper and valve, if included in Project.

b. I/O listed in table format showing point name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and cross-reference to product data sheet number.

c. A graphic showing location of control I/O in proper relationship to HVAC system. d. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating

labels for all wiring terminals. e. Unique identification of each I/O that shall be consistently used between different

drawings showing same point. f. Elementary wiring diagrams of controls for HVAC equipment motor circuits

including interlocks, switches, relays and interface to DDC controllers. g. Narrative sequence of operation. h. Graphic sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks.

7. Control panel drawings indicating the following: a. Panel dimensions, materials, size, and location of field cable, raceways, and tubing

connections. b. Interior subpanel layout, drawn to scale and showing all internal components,

cabling and wiring raceways, nameplates and allocated spare space.



c. Front, rear, and side elevations and nameplate legend. d. Unique drawing for each panel.

8. DDC system network riser diagram indicating the following: a. Each device connected to network with unique identification for each. b. Interconnection of each different network in DDC system. c. For each network, indicate communication protocol, speed and physical means of

interconnecting network devices, such as copper cable type, or fiber-optic cable type. Indicate raceway type and size for each.

d. Each network port for connection of an operator workstation or other type of operator interface with unique identification for each.

9. DDC system electrical power riser diagram indicating the following: a. Each point of connection to field power with requirements

(volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each. b. Each control power supply including, as applicable, transformers, power-line

conditioners, transient voltage suppression and high filter noise units, DC power supplies, and UPS units with unique identification for each.

c. Each product requiring power with requirements (volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each.

d. Power wiring type and size, race type, and size for each. 10. Monitoring and control signal diagrams indicating the following:

a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O. b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product. c. Control signal tubing to sensors, switches and transmitters. d. Process signal tubing to sensors, switches and transmitters.

11. Color graphics indicating the following: a. Itemized list of color graphic displays to be provided. b. For each display screen to be provided, a true color copy showing layout of

pictures, graphics and data displayed. c. Intended operator access between related hierarchical display screens.

F. System Description: 1. Full description of DDC system architecture, network configuration, operator interfaces

and peripherals, servers, controller types and applications, gateways, routers and other network devices, and power supplies.

2. Complete listing and description of each report, log and trend for format and timing and events which initiate generation.

3. System and product operation under each potential failure condition including, but not limited to, the following: a. Loss of power. b. Loss of network communication signal. c. Loss of controller signals to inputs and outpoints. d. Operator workstation failure. e. Server failure. f. Gateway failure. g. Network failure h. Controller failure. i. Instrument failure. j. Control damper and valve actuator failure.

4. Complete bibliography of documentation and media to be delivered to Owner. 5. Description of testing plans and procedures. 6. Description of Owner training.

G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For DDC system products and installation indicated as being delegated.



1. Supporting documentation showing DDC system design complies with performance requirements indicated, including calculations and other documentation necessary to prove compliance.

2. Schedule and design calculations for control dampers and actuators. a. Flow at Project design and minimum flow conditions. b. Face velocity at Project design and minimum airflow conditions. c. Pressure drop across damper at Project design and minimum airflow conditions. d. AMCA 500-D damper installation arrangement used to calculate and schedule

pressure drop, as applicable to installation. e. Maximum close-off pressure. f. Leakage airflow at maximum system pressure differential (fan close-off pressure). g. Torque required at worst case condition for sizing actuator. h. Actuator selection indicating torque provided. i. Actuator signal to control damper (on, close or modulate). j. Actuator position on loss of power. k. Actuator position on loss of control signal.

3. Schedule and design calculations for control valves and actuators. a. Flow at Project design and minimum flow conditions. b. Pressure-differential drop across valve at Project design flow condition. c. Maximum system pressure-differential drop (pump close-off pressure) across valve

at Project minimum flow condition. d. Design and minimum control valve coefficient with corresponding valve position. e. Maximum close-off pressure. f. Leakage flow at maximum system pressure differential. g. Torque required at worst case condition for sizing actuator. h. Actuator selection indicating torque provided. i. Actuator signal to control damper (on, close or modulate). j. Actuator position on loss of power. k. Actuator position on loss of control signal.

4. Schedule and design calculations for selecting flow instruments. a. Instrument flow range. b. Project design and minimum flow conditions with corresponding accuracy, control

signal to transmitter and output signal for remote control. c. Extreme points of extended flow range with corresponding accuracy, control signal

to transmitter and output signal for remote control. d. Pressure-differential loss across instrument at Project design flow conditions. e. Where flow sensors are mated with pressure transmitters, provide information for

each instrument separately and as an operating pair.


A. Coordination Drawings: 1. Plan drawings and corresponding product installation details, drawn to scale, on which

the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: a. Product installation location shown in relationship to room, duct, pipe and

equipment. b. Structural members to which products will be attached. c. Wall-mounted instruments located in finished space showing relationship to light

switches, fire-alarm devices and other installed devices. d. Size and location of wall access panels for products installed behind walls and

requiring access. 2. Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are

shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:



a. Ceiling components. b. Size and location of access panels for products installed above inaccessible ceiling

assemblies and requiring access. c. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

1) Lighting fixtures. 2) Air outlets and inlets. 3) Speakers. 4) Sprinklers. 5) Access panels. 6) Motion sensors. 7) Pressure sensors. 8) Temperature sensors and other DDC control system instruments.

B. Qualification Data: 1. Systems Provider Qualification Data:

a. Resume of project manager assigned to Project. b. Resumes of application engineering staff assigned to Project. c. Resumes of installation and programming technicians assigned to Project. d. Resumes of service technicians assigned to Project. e. Brief description of past project including physical address, floor area, number of

floors, building system cooling and heating capacity and building's primary function.

f. Description of past project DDC system, noting similarities to Project scope and complexity indicated.

g. Names of staff assigned to past project that will also be assigned to execute work of this Project.

h. Owner contact information for past project including name, phone number, and e-mail address.

i. Contractor contact information for past project including name, phone number, and e-mail address.

j. Engineer contact information for past project including name, phone number, and e-mail address.

2. Manufacturer's qualification data. 3. Testing agency's qualifications data.

C. Product Certificates: 1. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certifying that each proposed DDC system

component complies with ASHRAE 135.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For DDC system to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following: a. Project Record Drawings of as-built versions of submittal Shop Drawings provided

in electronic PDF format. b. Testing and commissioning reports and checklists of completed final versions of

reports, checklists, and trend logs. c. As-built versions of submittal Product Data.



d. Names, addresses, e-mail addresses and 24-hour telephone numbers of Installer and service representatives for DDC system and products.

e. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems including logging on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control and changing set points and variables.

f. Programming manuals with description of programming language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database creation and modification, of program creation and modification, and of editor use.

g. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manuals that explain how to: 1) Design and install new points, panels, and other hardware. 2) Perform preventive maintenance and calibration. 3) Debug hardware problems. 4) Repair or replace hardware.

h. Documentation of all programs created using custom programming language including set points, tuning parameters, and object database.

i. Backup copy of graphic files, programs, and database on electronic media such as DVDs.

j. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers. k. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information

for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment and sensors. l. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating systems,

custom programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software.

m. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents. n. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components,

including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time between tasks; and task descriptions.

o. Owner training materials.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials and parts that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Include product manufacturers' recommended parts lists for proper product operation over four-year period following warranty period. Parts list shall be indicated for each year.

C. Furnish parts, as indicated by manufacturer's recommended parts list, for product operation during two-year period following warranty period.


A. DDC System Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Nationally recognized manufacturer of DDC systems and products. 2. DDC systems with similar requirements to those indicated for a continuous period of five

years within time of bid. 3. DDC systems and products that have been successfully tested and in use on at least

three past projects. 4. Having complete published catalog literature, installation, operation and maintenance

manuals for all products intended for use. 5. Having full-time in-house employees for the following:

a. Product research and development. b. Product and application engineering.



c. Product manufacturing, testing and quality control. d. Technical support for DDC system installation training, commissioning and

troubleshooting of installations. e. Owner operator training.

B. DDC System Provider Qualifications: 1. Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer. 2. In-place facility located within 30 miles of Project. 3. Demonstrated past experience with installation of DDC system products being installed

for period within three consecutive years before time of bid. 4. Demonstrated past experience on five projects of similar complexity, scope and value. 5. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience. 6. Staffing resources of competent and experienced full-time employees that are assigned

to execute work according to schedule. 7. Service and maintenance staff assigned to support Project during warranty period. 8. Product parts inventory to support on-going DDC system operation for a period of not

less than 5 years after Substantial Completion. 9. DDC system manufacturer's backing to take over execution of Work if necessary to

comply with requirements indicated. Include Project-specific written letter, signed by manufacturer's corporate officer, if requested.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in

service to Owner. 2. Include updates or upgrades to software and firmware if necessary to resolve

deficiencies. a. Install updates only after receiving Owner's written authorization.

3. Warranty service shall occur during normal business hours and commence within 24 hours of Owner's warranty service request.

4. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. a. For Gateway: Three-year parts and labor warranty for each.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. The following are approved control system suppliers, manufacturers, and product lines:

Supplier Manufacturer Product Line

David Shay, OC HVAC 714-562-6549

Johnson Controls Inc. JCI FXPCG

B. Control systems shall comply with the terms of this specification.

1. The Contractor shall use only operator workstation software, controller software, custom application programming language, and controllers from the corresponding manufacturer and product line unless Owner approves use of multiple manufacturers.

2. Other products specified herein (such as sensors, valves, dampers, and actuators) need not be manufactured by the above manufacturers.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Use new products the manufacturer is currently manufacturing and selling for use in new installations. Do not use this installation as a product test site unless explicitly approved in writing by Owner. Spare parts shall be available for at least five years after completion of this contract.

2.3 DDC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Microprocessor-based monitoring and control including analog/digital conversion and program logic. A control loop or subsystem in which digital and analog information is received and processed by a microprocessor, and digital control signals are generated based on control algorithms and transmitted to field devices to achieve a set of predefined conditions. 1. DDC system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of distributed DDC

controllers, operator interfaces, and software.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.4 COMMUNICATION

A. Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers shall comprise a BACnet internetwork. Controller and operator interface communication shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet.

B. Install new wiring and network devices as required to provide a complete and workable control network.

C. Each controller shall have a communication port for temporary connection to a laptop computer or other operator interface. Connection shall support memory downloads and other commissioning and troubleshooting operations.

D. Internetwork operator interface and value passing shall be transparent to internetwork architecture. 1. An operator interface connected to a controller shall allow the operator to interface with

each internetwork controller as if directly connected. Controller information such as data, status, and control algorithms shall be viewable and editable from each internetwork controller.

2. Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate control strategies across multiple controllers shall be readable by each controller on the internetwork. Program and test all cross-controller links required to execute control strategies specified in Section 23 09 93. An authorized operator shall be able to edit cross-controller links by typing a standard object address or by using a point-and-click interface.

E. Workstations, Building Control Panels, and Controllers with real-time clocks shall use the BACnet Time Synchronization service. System shall automatically synchronize system clocks daily from an operator-designated device via the internetwork. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight saving and standard time as applicable.

F. System shall be expandable to at least twice the required input and output objects with additional controllers, associated devices, and wiring.



2.5 OPERATOR INTERFACE (EXISTING IN BUILDING 3100)

A. The Operator Workstation or server shall conform to the BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS) or BACnet Advanced Workstation (B-AWS) device profile as specified in ASHRAE/ANSI 135 BACnet Annex L.

B. Operator Interface. Web server shall reside on high-speed JCI ADX server network with building controllers. Each standard browser connected to server shall be able to access all system information.

C. Communication. Web server or workstation and controllers shall communicate using BACnet protocol. Web server or workstation and control network backbone shall communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP addressing as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135, BACnet Annex J.

2.6 SYSTEM SOFTWARE.

A. Operating System. Web server or workstation shall have an industry-standard professional-grade operating system. Operating system shall meet or exceed the DDC System manufacturers minimum requirements for their software. Typically acceptable systems include Microsoft Windows 10, Microsoft Windows 8, Microsoft Windows 7, Microsoft Vista, Microsoft Windows XP Pro.

B. System Graphics. The operator interface software shall be graphically based and shall include at least one graphic per piece of equipment or occupied zone, graphics for each chilled water and hot water system, and graphics that summarize conditions on each floor of each building included in this contract. Indicate thermal comfort on floor plan summary graphics using dynamic colors to represent zone temperature relative to zone setpoint. 1. Functionality. Graphics shall allow operator to monitor system status, to view a summary

of the most important data for each controlled zone or piece of equipment, to use point-and-click navigation between zones or equipment, and to edit setpoints and other specified parameters.

2. Animation. Graphics shall be able to animate by displaying different image files for changed object status.

3. Alarm Indication. Indicate areas or equipment in an alarm condition using color or other visual indicator.

4. Format. Graphics shall be saved in an industry-standard format such as BMP, JPEG, PNG, or GIF. Web-based system graphics shall be viewable on browsers compatible with World Wide Web Consortium browser standards. Web graphic format shall require no plug-in (such as HTML and JavaScript) or shall only require widely available no-cost plug-ins (such as Active-X and Adobe Flash).

C. Custom Graphics. Custom graphic files shall be created with the use of a graphics generation package furnished with the system. The graphics generation package shall be a graphically based system that uses the mouse to create and modify graphics that are saved in the same formats as are used for system graphics.

D. Graphics Library. Furnish a complete library of standard HVAC equipment graphics such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and unit ventilators. This library also shall include standard symbols for other equipment including fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers, and ductwork. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the graphics generation package program.



2.7 SYSTEM APPLICATIONS.

A. System shall provide the following functionality to authorized operators as an integral part of the operator interface or as stand-alone software programs. If furnished as part of the interface, the tool shall be available from each workstation or web browser interface. If furnished as a stand-alone program, software shall be installable on standard IBM-compatible PCs with no limit on the number of copies that can be installed under the system license.

B. Automatic System Database Configuration. Each workstation or web server shall store on its hard disk a copy of the current system database, including controller firmware and software. Stored database shall be automatically updated with each system configuration or controller firmware or software change.

C. Manual Controller Memory Download. Operators shall be able to download memory from the system database to each controller.

D. System Configuration. The workstation software shall provide a method of configuring the system. This shall allow for future system changes or additions by users under proper password protection. Operators shall be able to configure the system.

E. On-Line Help. Provide a context-sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operating and editing the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available through the use of hypertext.

F. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. 1. Operator Access. The user name and password combination shall define accessible

viewing, editing, adding, and deleting privileges for that operator. Users with system administrator rights shall be able to create new users and edit the privileges of all existing users. System Administrators shall also be able to vary and deny each operator's privileges based on the geographic location, such as the ability to edit operating parameters in Building A, to view but not edit parameters in Building B, and to not even see equipment in Building C.

2. Automatic Log Out. Automatically log out each operator if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto logoff time shall be user adjustable.

3. Encrypted Security Data. Store system security data including operator passwords in an encrypted format. System shall not display operator passwords.

G. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all building management panels and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.

H. Alarm Processing. System input and status objects shall be configurable to alarm on departing from and on returning to normal state. Operator shall be able to enable or disable each alarm and to configure alarm limits, alarm limit differentials, alarm states, and alarm reactions for each system object. Configure and enable alarm points as specified in Section 23 09 93 (Sequences of Operation). Alarms shall be BACnet alarm objects and shall use BACnet alarm services.

I. Alarm Messages. Alarm messages shall use the English language descriptor for the object in alarm in such a way that the operator will be able to recognize the source, location, and nature of the alarm without relying on acronyms.



J. Alarm Reactions. Operator shall be able to configure (by object) what, if any actions are to be taken during an alarm. As a minimum, the workstation or web server shall be able to log, print, start programs, display messages, send e-mail, send page, and audibly annunciate.

K. Alarm and Event log. Operators shall be able to view all system alarms and changes of state from any location in the system. Events shall be listed chronologically. An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and delete alarms, and archive closed alarms to the workstation or web server hard disk.

L. Trend Logs. The operator shall be able to configure trend sample or change of value (COV) interval, start time, and stop time for each system data object and shall be able to retrieve data for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs. Controller shall sample and store trend data and shall be able to archive data to the hard disk. Configure trends as specified in Section 23 09 93 (Sequences of Operation). Trends shall be BACnet trend objects.

M. Object and Property Status and Control. Provide a method for the operator to view, and edit if applicable, the status of any object or property in the system. The status shall be available by menu, on graphics, or through custom programs.

N. Reports and Logs. Operator shall be able to select, to modify, to create, and to print reports and logs. Operator shall be able to store report data in a format accessible by standard spreadsheet and word processing programs.

O. Standard Reports. Furnish the following standard system reports: 1. Objects. System objects and current values filtered by object type, by status (in alarm,

locked, normal), by equipment, by geographic location, or by combination of filter criteria. 2. Alarm Summary. Current alarms and closed alarms. System shall retain closed alarms

for an adjustable period. 3. Logs. System shall log the following to a database or text file and shall retain data for an

adjustable period: a. Alarm History.

4. Trend Data. Operator shall be able to select trends to be logged. 5. Operator Activity. At a minimum, system shall log operator log in and log out, control

parameter changes, schedule changes, and alarm acknowledgment and deletion. System shall date and time stamp logged activity.

P. Environmental Index. System shall monitor all occupied zones and compile an index that provides a numerical indication of the environmental comfort within the zone. As a minimum, this indication shall be based upon the deviation of the zone temperature from the heating or cooling setpoint. If humidity is being measured within the zone then the environmental index shall be adjusted to reflect a lower comfort level for high or low humidity levels. Similarly, if carbon dioxide levels are being measured as an indication of ventilation effectiveness then the environmental index shall be adjusted to indicate degraded comfort at high carbon dioxide levels. Other adjustments may be made to the environmental index based upon additional measurements. The system shall maintain a trend of the environmental index for each zone in the trend log. The system shall also compute an average comfort index for every building included in this contract and maintain trendlogs of these building environmental indices. Similarly, the system shall compute the percentage of occupied time that comfortable conditions were maintained within the zones. Through the UI the user shall be able to add a weighting factor to adjust the contribution of each zone to the average index based upon the floor area of the zone, importance of the zone, or other static criteria.

Q. Custom Reports. Operator shall be able to create custom reports that retrieve data, including archived trend data, from the system, that analyze data using common algebraic calculations,



and that present results in tabular or graphical format. Reports shall be launched from the operator interface.

2.8 WORKSTATION APPLICATION EDITORS.

A. Each PC or browser workstation shall support editing of all system applications. The applications shall be downloaded and executed at one or more of the controller panels.

B. Controller. Provide a full-screen editor for each type of application that shall allow the operator to view and change the configuration, name, control parameters, and set points for all controllers.

C. Scheduling. An editor for the scheduling application shall be provided at each workstation. Provide a method of selecting the desired schedule and schedule type. Exception schedules and holidays shall be shown clearly on the calendar. The start and stop times for each object shall be adjustable from this interface.

D. Custom Application Programming. Provide the tools to create, edit, debug, and download custom programs. System shall be fully operable while custom programs are edited, compiled, and downloaded. Programming language shall have the following features: 1. Language. Language shall be graphically based and shall use function blocks arranged

in a logic diagram that clearly shows control logic flow. Function blocks shall directly provide functions listed below, and operators shall be able to create custom or compound function blocks.

2. Programming Environment. Tool shall provide a full-screen, cursor-and-mouse-driven programming environment that incorporates word processing features such as cut and paste. Operators shall be able to insert, add, modify, and delete custom programming code, and to copy blocks of code to a file library for reuse in other control programs.

3. Independent Program Modules. Operator shall be able to develop independently executing program modules that can disable, enable and exchange data with other program modules.

4. Debugging and Simulation. Operator shall be able to step through the program observing intermediate values and results. Operator shall be able to adjust input variables to simulate actual operating conditions. Operator shall be able to adjust each step’s time increment to observe operation of delays, integrators, and other time-sensitive control logic. Debugger shall provide error messages for syntax and for execution errors.

5. Conditional Statements. Operator shall be able to program conditional logic using compound Boolean (AND, OR, and NOT) and relational (EQUAL, LESS THAN, GREATER THAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons.

6. Mathematical Functions. Language shall support floating-point addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and square root operations, as well as absolute value calculation and programmatic selection of minimum and maximum values from a list of values.

7. Variables. Operator shall be able to use variable values in program conditional statements and mathematical functions. a. Time Variables. Operator shall be able to use predefined variables to represent

time of day, day of the week, month of the year, and date. Other predefined variables or simple control logic shall provide elapsed time in seconds, minutes, hours, and days. Operator shall be able to start, stop, and reset elapsed time variables using the program language.

b. System Variables. Operator shall be able to use predefined variables to represent status and results of Controller Software and shall be able to enable, disable, and change setpoints of Controller Software as described in Controller Software section.



E. Portable Operator's Terminal. Provide all necessary software to configure an IBM-compatible laptop computer for use as a Portable Operator’s Terminal. Operator shall be able to connect configured Terminal to the system network or directly to each controller for programming, setting up, and troubleshooting.

2.9 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Performance Standards. System shall conform to the following minimum standards over network connections. Systems shall be tested using manufacturer’s recommended hardware and software for operator workstation (server and browser for web-based systems). 1. Graphic Display. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall display with current data within

10 sec. 2. Graphic Refresh. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall update with current data within 8

sec.and shall automatically refresh every 15 sec. 3. Configuration and Tuning Screens. Screens used for configuring, calibrating, or tuning

points, PID loops, and similar control logic shall automatically refresh within 6 sec. 4. Object Command. Devices shall react to command of a binary object within 2 sec.

Devices shall begin reacting to command of an analog object within 2 sec. 5. Alarm Response Time. An object that goes into alarm shall be annunciated at the

workstation within 45 sec. 6. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of

running as often as once every 5 sec. Select execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.

7. Performance. Programmable controllers shall be able to completely execute DDC PID control loops at a frequency adjustable down to once per sec. Select execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.

8. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. Each workstation on the network shall receive alarms within 5 sec of other workstations.

9. Reporting Accuracy. System shall report values with minimum end-to-end accuracy listed in Table 1.

10. Control Stability and Accuracy. Control loops shall maintain measured variable at setpoint within tolerances listed in Table 2.

B. Table-1 Reporting Accuracy

Measured Variable Reported Accuracy

Space Temperature ±0.5% at 77F

Ducted Air ±0.2% at 32F

Outside Air ±0.2% at 32F

Dew Point ±2ºF

Water Temperature ±0.2% at 32F

Delta-T ±0.10º (±0.20ºF)

Relative Humidity ±5% RH

Water Flow ±0.2% of full scale

Airflow (terminal) ±5% of full scale (see Note 1)

Airflow (measuring stations) ±2% of full scale

Airflow (pressurized spaces) ±1% of full scale

Air Pressure (ducts) ±0.05 in. w.g.

Air Pressure (space) ±0.01 in. w.g.

Water Pressure ±2% of full scale (see Note 2)



Electrical ±1% of reading (see Note 3)

Carbon Monoxide (CO) ±5% of reading

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) ±25 ppm

Note 1: Accuracy applies to 5%–100% of scale Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure Note 3: Not including utility-supplied meter

C. Table-2 Control Stability and Accuracy

Controlled Variable Control Accuracy Range of Medium

Air Pressure ±50 Pa (±0.2 in. w.g.) ±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)

0–1.5 kPa (0–6 in. w.g.) -25 to 25 Pa (-0.1 to 0.1 in. w.g.)

Airflow ±3% of full scale

Space Temperature ±0.5 ºC (±1.0ºF)

Duct Temperature ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)

Humidity ±5% RH

Fluid Pressure ±10 kPa (±1.5 psi) ±250 Pa (±1.0 in. w.g.)

MPa (1–150 psi) 0–12.5 kPa (0–50 in. w.g.) differ-ential

2.10 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. Furnish the following applications for building and energy management. All software application shall reside and operate in the system controllers. Applications shall be editable through operator workstation, web browser interface, or engineering workstation.

B. System Security. See Paragraph 2.3.E.5 (Security) and Paragraph 2.3.E.14.c.iii (Operator Activity).

C. Scheduling. Provide the capability to execute control functions according to a user created or edited schedule. Each schedule shall provide the following schedule options as a minimum: 1. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Each schedule

shall be able to include up to 5 occupied periods (5 start-stop pairs or 10 events). 2. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year

as an exception schedule. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule has executed, the system shall discard and replace the exception schedule with the standard schedule for that day of the week.

3. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 24 special or holiday schedules. These schedules will be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday period.

D. System Coordination. Operator shall be able to group related equipment based on function and location and to use these groups for scheduling and other applications.

E. Binary Alarms. Each binary object shall have the capability to be configured to alarm based on the operator-specified state. Provide the capability to automatically and manually disable alarming.

F. Analog Alarms. Each analog object shall have both high and low alarm limits. The operator shall be able to enable or disable these alarms.



G. Alarm Reporting. The operator shall be able to determine the action to be taken in the event of an alarm. An alarm shall be able to start programs, print, be logged in the event log, generate custom messages, and display on graphics.

H. Remote Communication. System shall automatically contact operator workstation or server on receipt of critical alarms. If no network connection is available, system shall use a modem connection.

I. Maintenance Management. The system shall be capable of generating maintenance alarms when equipment exceeds adjustable runtime, equipment starts, or performance limits. Configure and enable maintenance alarms as specified in 23 09 93 (Sequences of Operation).

J. Sequencing. Application software shall sequence chillers, boilers, and pumps as specified in Section 23 09 93 (Sequences of Operation).

K. PID Control. System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithms. Each algorithm shall have anti-windup and selectable controlled variable, setpoint, and PID gains. Each algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value that can be used to position an output or to stage a series of outputs. The calculation interval, PID gains, and other tuning parameters shall be adjustable by a user with the correct security level.

L. Staggered Start. System shall stagger controlled equipment restart after power outage. Operator shall be able to adjust equipment restart order and time delay between equipment restarts.

M. Energy Calculations. 1. The system shall accumulate and convert instantaneous power (kW) or flow rates (gpm) 2. 0 to energy usage data. 3. The system shall calculate a sliding-window average (rolling average). Operator shall be

able to adjust window interval to 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or 60 minutes.

N. Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output objects shall be protected from short cycling by means of adjustable minimum on-time and off-time settings.

O. On and Off Control with Differential. Provide an algorithm that allows a binary output to be cycled based on a controlled variable and a setpoint. The algorithm shall be direct-acting or reverse-acting.

P. Runtime Totalization. Provide software to totalize runtime for each binary input and output. Operator shall be able to enable runtime alarm based on exceeded adjustable runtime limit. Configure and enable runtime totalization and alarms as specified in Section 23 09 93 (Sequence of Operations).

2.11 CONTROLLERS

A. General. Provide an adequate number of Building Controllers (BC), Advanced Application Controllers (AAC), Application Specific Controllers (ASC), Smart Actuators (SA), and Smart Sensors (SS) as required to achieve performance specified in Section 23 09 23 Article 1.9 (System Performance). Every device in the system which executes control logic and directly controls HVAC equipment must conform to a standard BACnet Device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135, BACnet Annex L. Unless otherwise specified, hardwired actuators and sensors may be used in lieu of BACnet Smart Actuators and Smart Sensors.



2.12 BACNET

A. Building Controllers (BCs). Each BC shall conform to BACnet Building Controller (B-BC) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135, BACnet Annex L, and shall be listed as a certified B-BC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.

B. Advanced Application Controllers (AACs). Each AAC shall conform to BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-AAC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.

C. Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). Each ASC shall conform to BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-ASC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.

D. Smart Sensors (SSs). Each SS shall conform to BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-SS in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.

E. BACnet Communication. 1. Each BC shall reside on or be connected to a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3

(Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP addressing. 2. BACnet routing shall be performed by BCs or other BACnet device routers as necessary

to connect BCs to networks of AACs and ASCs. 3. Each AAC shall reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data

Link/Physical layer protocol with BACnet/IP addressing, or it shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

4. Each ASC shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

5. Each SA shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

6. Each SS shall reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol with BACnet/IP addressing, or it shall reside on a BACnet network using ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

F. Communication 1. Service Port. Each controller shall provide a service communication port for connection to

a Portable Operator’s Terminal. Connection shall be extended to space temperature sensor ports where shown on drawings.

2. Signal Management. BC and ASC operating systems shall manage input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and to allow for central monitoring and alarms.

3. Data Sharing. Each BC and AAC shall share data as required with each networked BC and AAC.

4. Stand-Alone Operation. Each piece of equipment specified in Section 23 09 93 shall be controlled by a single controller to provide stand-alone control in the event of communication failure. All I/O points specified for a piece of equipment shall be integral to its controller. Provide stable and reliable stand-alone control using default values or other method for values normally read over the network such as outdoor air conditions, supply air or water temperature coming from source equipment, etc.

G. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for anticipated ambient conditions. 1. Controllers used outdoors or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted in waterproof

enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -29°C to 60°C (-20°F to 140°F).



2. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-protective enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F).

H. Keypad. Provide a local keypad and display for each BC and AAC. Operator shall be able to use keypad to view and edit data. Keypad and display shall require password to prevent unauthorized use. If the manufacturer does not normally provide a keypad and display for each BC and AAC, provide the software and any interface cabling needed to use a laptop computer as a Portable Operator’s Terminal for the system.

I. Real-Time Clock. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.

J. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to a field-removable modular terminal strip or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. Each BC and AAC shall continually check its processor and memory circuit status and shall generate an alarm on abnormal operation. System shall continuously check controller network and generate alarm for each controller that fails to respond.

K. Memory. 1. Controller memory shall support operating system, database, and programming

requirements. 2. Each BC and AAC shall retain BIOS and application programming for at least 72 hours in

the event of power loss. 3. Each ASC and SA shall use nonvolatile memory and shall retain BIOS and application

programming in the event of power loss. System shall automatically download dynamic control parameters following power loss.

L. Immunity to Power and Noise. Controllers shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).

M. Transformer. ASC power supply shall be fused or current limiting and shall be rated at a minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption.

2.13 INPUT AND OUTPUT INTERFACE

A. General. Hard-wire input and output points to BCs, AACs, ASCs, or SAs.

B. Protection. All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself, to another point, or to ground shall cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24 V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause no controller damage.

C. Binary Inputs. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of ON/OFF signals from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control devices and shall be protected against contact bounce and noise. Binary inputs shall sense dry contact closure without application of power external to the controller.

D. Pulse Accumulation Inputs. Pulse accumulation inputs shall conform to binary input requirements and shall also accumulate up to 10 pulses per second.



E. Analog Inputs. Analog inputs shall monitor low-voltage (0–10 Vdc), current (4–20 mA), or resistance (thermistor or RTD) signals. Analog inputs shall be compatible with and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.

F. Binary Outputs. Binary outputs shall provide for ON/OFF operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. Binary outputs on Building Controllers shall have three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for normally open or normally closed operation.

G. Analog Outputs. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0–10 Vdc or a 4–20 mA signal as required to properly control output devices. Each Building Controller analog output shall have a two-position (auto-manual) switch, a manually adjustable potentiometer, and status lights. Analog outputs shall not drift more than 0.4% of range annually.

H. Tri-State Outputs. Control three-point floating electronic actuators without feedback with tri-state outputs (two coordinated binary outputs). Tri-State outputs may be used to provide analog output control in zone control and terminal unit control applications such as VAV terminal units, duct-mounted heating coils, and zone dampers.

I. System Object Capacity. The system size shall be expandable to at least twice the number of input/ output objects required for this project. Additional controllers (along with associated devices and wiring) shall be all that is necessary to achieve this capacity requirement. The operator interfaces installed for this project shall not require any hardware additions or software revisions in order to expand the system

2.14 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING

A. Power Supplies. Control transformers shall be UL listed. Furnish Class 2 current-limiting type or furnish over-current protection in primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service in accordance with NEC requirements. Limit connected loads to 80% of rated capacity. 1. DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Unit shall

be full-wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak-to-peak. Regulation shall be 1.0% line and load combined, with 100-microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage and over-current protection and shall be able to withstand 150% current overload for at least three seconds without trip-out or failure. a. Unit shall operate between 0°C and 50°C (32°F and 120°F). EM/RF shall meet

FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MILSTD 810C for shock and vibration.

b. Line voltage units shall be UL recognized and CSA listed.

B. Power Line Filtering. 1. Provide internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations and

controllers. Surge protection shall have: a. Dielectric strength of 1000 V minimum b. Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less c. Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater d. Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40–100 Hz

2.15 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A. Motorized Control Dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be as follow.



1. Type. Control dampers shall be the parallel or opposed-blade type as specified below or as scheduled on drawings. a. Outdoor and return air mixing dampers and face-and-bypass dampers shall be

parallel-blade and shall direct airstreams toward each other. b. Other modulating dampers shall be opposed-blade. c. Two-position shutoff dampers shall be parallel- or opposed-blade with blade and

side seals. 2. Frame. Damper frames shall be 13 gauge galvanized steel channel or ⅛ in. extruded

aluminum with reinforced corner bracing. 3. Blades. Damper blades shall not exceed 8 in. in width or 48 in. in length. Blades shall be

suitable for medium velocity 2000 fpm performance. Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge.

4. Shaft Bearings. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application, oil impregnated sintered bronze, or better.

5. Seals. Blade edges and frame top and bottom shall have replaceable seals of butyl rubber or neoprene. Side seals shall be spring-loaded stainless steel. Blade seals shall leak no more than 10 cfm per ft2 at 4 in. w.g. differential pressure. Blades shall be airfoil type suitable for wide-open face velocity of 1500 fpm.

6. Sections. Individual damper sections shall not exceed 48 in. × 60 in. Each section shall have at least one damper actuator.

7. Modulating dampers shall provide a linear flow characteristic where possible. 8. Linkages. Dampers shall have exposed linkages.

B. Electric Damper and Valve Actuators. 1. Stall Protection. Mechanical or electronic stall protection shall prevent actuator damage

throughout the actuator’s rotation. 2. Spring-return Mechanism. Actuators used for power-failure and safety applications shall

have an internal mechanical spring-return mechanism or an uninterruptible power supply (UPS).

3. Signal and Range. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0–10 Vdc or a 0–20 mA control signal and shall have a 2–10 Vdc or 4–20 mA operating range. (Floating motor actuators may be substituted for proportional actuators in terminal unit applications as described in paragraph 2.6H.)

4. Wiring. 24 Vac and 24 Vdc actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring. 5. Manual Positioning. Operators shall be able to manually position each actuator when the

actuator is not powered. Non-spring-return actuators shall have an external manual gear release. Spring-return actuators with more than 7 N·m (60 in.-lb) torque capacity shall have a manual crank.

C. Control Valves. 1. Control valves shall be two-way or three-way type for two-position or modulating service

as shown. 2. Close-off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to

provide the following minimum close-off pressure ratings: a. Water Valves:

1) Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head. 2) Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design

flow or 100% of total system (pump) head. 3. Water Valves.

a. Body and trim style and materials shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for design conditions and service shown, with equal percentage ports for modulating service.

b. Sizing Criteria: 1) Two-position service: Line size.



2) Two-way modulating service: Pressure drop shall be equal to twice the pressure drop through heat exchanger (load), 50% of the pressure difference between supply and return mains, or 5 psi, whichever is greater.

3) Three-way modulating service: Pressure drop equal to twice the pressure drop through the coil exchanger (load), 35 kPa (5 psi) maximum.

4) Valves ½ in. through 2 in. shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class 250, spring-loaded, PTFE packing, quick opening for two-position service. Two-way valves to have replaceable composition disc or stainless steel ball.

5) Valves 2½ in. and larger shall be cast iron ANSI Class 125 with guided plug and PTFE packing.

c. Water valves shall fail normally open or closed, as scheduled on plans, or as follows: 1) Water zone valves—normally open preferred. 2) Heating coils in air handlers—normally open. 3) Chilled water control valves—normally closed. 4) Other applications—as scheduled or as required by sequences of operation.

D. Airflow Measurement Stations

1. Airflow measurement:

a. Provide Ebtron Gold Series thermal dispersion airflow and temperature measure-ment device (ATMD) equipped with ‘C’ sensor density probes or approved equal.

b. The ATMD shall include the GTL116 industrial grade integrated transmitter and the Bacnet option. The static pressure manifold shall incorporate dual offset static tips on opposing sides of the averaging manifold so as to be insensitive to flow-angle variations of as much as +- 20 degrees in the approaching air stream.

c. Calibrated range: 0 to 5,000 FPM d. Operating temperature: probe: -20 to 160F transmitter: -20 to 120F e. Operating humidity range: 0 to 99% non-condensing; transmitter must be protected

from exposure to precipitation.

2. Transmitter and Enclosure a. Transmitter Construction: Heavy duty with industrial grade IC’s and rugged

aluminum chassis with sliding cover. b. Transmitter Dimensions: 9.3 x 6.7 x 2.5 inches (HxWxD) c. Transmitter mounting: four 0.19 inch diameter mounting holes located 0.75 in from

top/bottom, and 0.375 from left/right edges on integral mounting plate.

3. Sensor probes a. Factory Calibrated Sensor b. Accuracy: Airflow: ±2% of reading c. Temperature: ± 0.15°F d. Probe Construction: Type 6063 gold anodized aluminum e. Mounting Brackets: Type 304 SS f. Probe Dimensions: Alum: 1.1 in diameter g. Standard Size Ranges: 8 to 120 in for Insertion/Standoff Mount 12 to 120 in for

Internal Mount h. Maximum Quantity Probes / Sensing Nodes: 4 probes per transmitter; 8 sensing

nodes per probe; 16 nodes total max. i. Probe/Transmitter Cable: 10 ft. [3.05 m] plenum rated FEP cable, positive locking

connector with gold plated pins (Optional cable length of up to 50 feet)

E. Binary Temperature Devices.



1. Low-Voltage Space Thermostats. Low-voltage space thermostats shall be 24 V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C–30°C (55°F–85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.

2. Line-Voltage Space Thermostats. Line-voltage space thermostats shall be bimetal-actuated, open-contact type or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listing for electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C–30°C (55°F–85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.

3. Low-Limit Thermostats. Low-limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressure type. Element shall be at least 6 m (20 ft) long. Element shall sense temperature in each 30 cm (1 ft) section and shall respond to lowest sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.

F. Temperature Sensors. 1. Type. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or

thermistor. 2. Duct Sensors. Duct sensors shall be single point or averaging as shown. Averaging

sensors shall be a minimum of 1.5 m (5 ft) in length per 1 m2(10 ft2) of duct cross-section.

3. Immersion Sensors. Provide immersion sensors with a separable stainless steel well. Well pressure rating shall be consistent with system pressure it will be immersed in. Well shall withstand pipe design flow velocities.

4. Space Sensors. Space sensors shall have setpoint adjustment, override switch, display, and communication port as shown. For private offices and conference rooms, space temperature sensors shall be user adjustable, with temperature and setpoint indication. For classrooms, corridors, and other public spaces, space temperature sensors shall be non-adjustable with tamper proof cover. All conditioned spaces other than corridors shall be provided with an occupancy override switch for after hours operation.

5. Differential Sensors. Provide matched sensors for differential temperature measurement.

G. Humidity Sensors

1. Outside Air Dew Point Temperature

a. Dew point monitoring range -40/+115 F DP, 12% to 99% RH b. Output signal 4-20 mA c. Calibration adjustments zero & span d. Factory calibration point 70 F e. Accuracy at calibration point +2.0 Fdp

2. Room/duct Relative Humidity

a. Sensor Humidity range 0 to 100% b. Operating temperature 15 F to +170 F c. Accuracy +2% RH d. Sensing element Capacitive sensor e. Output signal 4-20 mA DC f. Installation adjustments zero & span g. Operating temperature 15 F to +170 F h. Voltage requirement 12-36 VDC

H. Pressure Sensors 1. Air static pressure sensor

a. Duct static range: -0.5 to + 7.5”wg



b. Accuracy: +- 0.05”wg c. Output signal: 4-20 mA d. Actual sensor used will be sized for its application so that it is accurate in the range

it will be reading. (e.g. room -0.5 - +0.5, fan static pressure 0 - 5.0", etc.)

I. Flow Switches. 1. Flow-proving switches shall be paddle (water service only) or differential pressure type

(air or water service) as shown. Switches shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, and pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum). a. Differential pressure switches shall have scale range and differential suitable for

intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

J. Relays. 1. Control Relays. Control relays shall be plug-in type, UL listed, and shall have dust cover

and LED “energized” indicator. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be suitable for application.

2. Time Delay Relays. Time delay relays shall be solid-state plug-in type, UL listed, and shall have adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable ±100% from setpoint shown. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for relays not installed in local control panel.

K. Override Timers. 1. Unless implemented in control software, override timers shall be spring-wound line

voltage, UL Listed, with contact rating and configuration required by application. Provide 0–6 hour calibrated dial unless otherwise specified. Flush mount timer on local control panel face or where shown.

L. Current Transmitters. 1. AC current transmitters shall be self-powered, combination split-core current transformer

type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4–20 mA two-wire output. Full-scale unit ranges shall be 10 A, 20 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A, and 200 A, with internal zero and span adjustment. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden.

2. Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA recognized.

3. Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.

M. Current Transformers. 1. AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized and shall be completely encased

(except for terminals) in approved plastic material. 2. Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected for ±1%

accuracy at 5 A full-scale output. 3. Use fixed-core transformers for new wiring installation and split-core transformers for

existing wiring installation.

N. Voltage Transmitters.

O. AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single-loop (two-wire) type, 4–20 mA output with zero and span adjustment.

P. Adjustable full-scale unit ranges shall be 100–130 Vac, 200–250 Vac, 250–330 Vac, and 400–600 Vac. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden.

Q. Transmitters shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA recognized at 600 Vac rating.



R. Voltage Transformers.

S. AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized, 600 Vac rated, and shall have built-in fuse protection.

T. Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 4°C–55°C (40°F–130°F) and shall provide ±0.5% accuracy at 24 Vac and 5 VA load.

U. Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or plastic.

V. Power Monitors. 1. Selectable rate pulse output for kWh reading, 4–20 mA output for kW reading, N.O. alarm

contact, and ability to operate with 5.0 amp current inputs or 0–0.33 volt inputs. 2. 1.0% full-scale true RMS power accuracy, +0.5 Hz, voltage input range 120–600 V, and

auto range select. 3. Under voltage/phase monitor circuitry. 4. NEMA 1 enclosure. 5. Current transformers having a 0.5% FS accuracy, 600 VAC isolation voltage with 0–0.33

V output. If 0–5 A current transformers are provided, a three-phase disconnect/shorting switch assembly is required.

W. BTU Meters (chilled and hot water). 1. Provide Onicon F-3100 Inline Magmeter Flow Sensor with System 10 BTU Interface

including matched temperature sensors. Integration shall be through bacnet. See Mechanical Drawings for location and sizes. a. General Water Flow Meter a. Operating Range: 0.033 to 33 ft/s b. Pipe Size Range: 1 in. to 48 in. c. Accuracy: ±0.2% of reading from 1.6 to 33 ft/s, +/- 0.0033 ft/s from 0.033 to 1.6 ft/s d. Minimum Conductivity: 5 μS/cm e. Class 150 flanges. f. Flow tube shall be epoxy coated steel and the sensing electrodes shall be 316

stainless steel.

2. Display/Controller/Temperature Sensors a. Provide Onicon System-10 or approved equal. b. Shall provide the following points both at the integral LCD and as outputs to the

BMS: 1) Energy Total 2) Energy Rate 3) Flow Rate 4) Supply and Return Temperatures

c. Provide BacNet interface. d. Output shall be either serial network (compliant with the BMS system) or via

individual analog and pulse outputs. e. Temperature sensors shall be loop-powered current based (mA) sensors and shall

be bath calibrated and matched (NIST traceable). Sensors shall be matched to an accuracy better than ± 0.15°F

f. Meter shall be provided per section above. g. Meter shall be re-programmable using the front panel keypad.

3. Max. Temperature/Pressure Rating a. Storage Temperature: -4 °F to 158 °F b. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% (non-condensing) c. Operating Temperature: Ambient: 14 °F to 158 °F, Media: 32 °F to 185 °F d. Maximum Operating Pressure: 150 psi @ 77 °F



4. Standards and Approvals a. NEMA 4X / IP65 Enclosure (with cap installed)

X. Current Switches. 1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current.

Select switches to match application current and DDC system output requirements.

Y. Pressure Transducers. 1. Transducers shall have linear output signal and field-adjustable zero and span. 2. Transducer sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions of positive

or negative pressure 50% greater than calibrated span without damage. 3. Water pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum proof

pressure of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Transducer shall have 4–20 mA output, suitable mounting provisions, and block and bleed valves.

4. Water differential pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum proof pressure of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Over-range limit (differential pressure) and maximum static pressure shall be 2000 kPa (300 psi.)Transducer shall have 4–20 mA output, suitable mounting provisions, and 5-valve manifold.

Z. Differential Pressure Switches. 1. Differential pressure switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting,

pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) and shall have scale range and differential suitable for intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

AA. Local Control Panels. 1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 construction with (hinged door)

key-lock latch and removable subpanels. A single key shall be common to all field panels and subpanels.

2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices shall be prewired with color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600 volt service, individually identified per control/ interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.

3. Provide ON/OFF power switch with overcurrent protection for control power sources to each local panel.

2.16 WIRING AND RACEWAYS

A. General. Provide copper wiring, plenum cable, and raceways as specified in applicable sections of Division 26.

B. Insulated wire shall use copper conductors and shall be UL listed for 90°C (200°F) minimum service.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.



B. Examine roughing-in for products to verify actual locations of connections before installation. 1. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in piping to verify actual locations of

connections before installation. 2. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of

connections before installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where product will be installed.

D. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. The contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or employees and shall be liable for all damage thus caused.

B. The contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The contractor shall protect any material that is not immediately installed. The contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.

3.3 DDC SYSTEM INTERFACE WITH OTHER SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Communication Interface to Equipment with Integral Controls: 1. DDC system shall have communication interface with equipment having integral controls

and having a communication interface for remote monitoring or control. 2. Equipment to Be Connected:

a. Air-handling unit VFDs specified in Section 237313 "Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units."

3.4 COORDINATION

A. Site 1. Where the mechanical work will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with,

work of other trades, the contractor shall assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. If the contractor installs his/her work before coordinating with other trades, so as to cause any interference with work of other trades, the contractor shall make the necessary changes in his/her work to correct the condition without extra charge.

2. Coordinate and schedule work with other work in the same area and with work dependent upon other work to facilitate mutual progress.

B. Test and Balance. 1. The contractor shall furnish a single set of all tools necessary to interface to the control

system for test and balance purposes. 2. The contractor shall provide training in the use of these tools. This training will be

planned for a minimum of 4 hours.



3. In addition, the contractor shall provide a qualified technician to assist in the test and balance process, until the first 20 terminal units are balanced.

4. The tools used during the test and balance process will be returned at the completion of the testing and balancing.

C. Life Safety. 1. Duct smoke detectors required for air handler shutdown are provided under Division 28.

Interlock smoke detectors to air handlers for shutdown as specified in Section 23 09 93 (Sequences of Operation).

3.5 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

A. Install equipment, piping, and wiring/raceway parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible.

B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

C. Install equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by Chapter 1 Article 100 Part A of the National Electrical Code (NEC).

D. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.

E. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.


A. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Section 23 09 23 Article 1.8 (Codes and Standards).

B. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship.

C. Contractor shall have work inspection by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

3.7 WIRING

A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with national and local electrical codes, and Division 26 of this specification, Where the requirements of this section differ from Division 26, the requirements of this section shall take precedence.

B. All NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL listed in approved raceway according to NEC and Division 26 requirements.

C. All low-voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements. Low-voltage power circuits shall be subfused when required to meet Class 2 current limit.



D. Where NEC Class 2 (current-limited) wires are in concealed and accessible locations, including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that cables are UL listed for the intended application.

E. All wiring in mechanical, electrical, or service rooms – or where subject to mechanical damage – shall be installed in raceway at levels below 3 m (10ft).

F. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceways containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high-voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for low-voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g. relays and transformers).

G. Do not install wiring in raceway containing tubing.

H. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring is to be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it and neatly tied at 3 m (10 ft) intervals.

I. Where plenum cables are used without raceway, they shall be supported from or anchored to structural members. Cables shall not be supported by or anchored to ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems.

J. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal block or terminal strip. All wire-to-wire connections shall be at a terminal block.

K. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.

L. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120 V. If only higher voltages are available, the contractor shall provide step-down transformers.

M. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted between termination points.

N. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all penetrations.

O. Size of raceway and size and type of wire type shall be the responsibility of the contractor in keeping with the manufacturer’s recommendations and NEC requirements, except as noted elsewhere.

P. Include one pull string in each raceway 2.5 cm (1 in.) or larger.

Q. Use color-coded conductors throughout with conductors of different colors.

R. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These enclosures include packaged equipment control panel enclosures unless they also contain Class 1 starters.

S. Conceal all raceways except within mechanical, electrical, or service rooms. Install raceway to maintain a minimum clearance of 15 cm (6 in.) from high-temperature equipment (e.g. steam pipes or flues).

T. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to the structure and spaced according to code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes may not be hung on flexible duct strap or tie rods. Raceways may not be run on or attached to ductwork.



U. Adhere to this specification's Division 26 requirements where raceway crosses building expansion joints.

V. Install insulated bushings on all raceway ends and openings to enclosures. Seal top end of vertical raceways.

W. The contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated (as-built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site.

X. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 1 m (3 ft) in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal raceway less than ½ in. electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways shall be used.

Y. Raceway must be rigidly installed, adequately supported, properly reamed at both ends, and left clean and free of obstructions. Raceway sections shall be joined with couplings (according to code). Terminations must be made with fittings at boxes, and ends not terminating in boxes shall have bushings installed.

3.8 CONTROL DEVICES FOR INSTALLATION BY INSTALLERS

A. Deliver selected control devices, specified in indicated HVAC instrumentation and control device Sections, to identified equipment and systems manufacturers for factory installation and to identified installers for field installation.

B. Deliver the following to duct fabricator and Installer for installation in ductwork. Include installation instructions to Installer and supervise installation for compliance with requirements. 1. DDC control dampers, which are specified in Section 230923.12 "DDC Control

Dampers." 2. Airflow sensors and switches, which are specified in Section 230923.14 "Flow

Instruments." 3. Pressure sensors, which are specified in Section 230923.23 "Pressure Instruments."

C. Deliver the following to HVAC piping installers for installation in piping. Include installation instructions to Installer and supervise installation for compliance with requirements. 1. Pipe-mounted sensors, switches and transmitters. Flow meters are specified in

Section 230923.14 "Flow Instruments." Liquid temperature sensors, switches, and transmitters are specified in Section 230923.27 "Temperature Instruments."

2. Tank-mounted sensors, switches and transmitters. Pressure sensors, switches, and transmitters are specified in Section 230923.23 "Pressure Instruments." Liquid temperature sensors, switches, and transmitters are specified in Section 230923.27 "Temperature Instruments."

3. Pipe-mounted thermowells are specified in Section 230923.27 "Temperature Instruments."

3.9 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install products to satisfy more stringent of all requirements indicated.

B. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.



C. Support products, tubing, piping wiring and raceways. Brace products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment when subjected to a force.

D. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by wall framing.

E. If codes and referenced standards are more stringent than requirements indicated, comply with requirements in codes and referenced standards.

F. All wires attached to sensors shall be sealed in their raceways or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas from affecting sensor readings.

G. Sensors used in mixing plenums and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type. Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner vertically across the duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.

H. Low-limit sensors used in mixing plenums shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip. Provide 3 m (1 ft) of sensing element for each 1 m2(1 ft2) of coil area.

I. Do not install temperature sensors within the vapor plume of a humidifier. If installing a sensor downstream of a humidifier, install it at least 3 m (10 ft) downstream.

J. Differential Air Static Pressure. 1. Supply Duct Static Pressure. Pipe the high-pressure tap to the duct using a pitot tube.

Pipe the low-pressure port to a tee in the height-pressure tap tubing of the corresponding building static pressure sensor (if applicable) or to the location of the duct high-pressure tap and leave open to the plenum.

2. Return Duct Static Pressure. Pipe high-pressure tap to duct using a pitot tube. Pipe the low-pressure port to a tee in the low-pressure tap tubing of the corresponding building static pressure sensor.

3. Building Static Pressure. Pipe the low-pressure port of the pressure sensor to the static pressure port located on the outside of the building through a high-volume accumulator. Pipe the high-pressure port to a location behind a thermostat cover.

4. The piping to the pressure ports on all pressure transducers shall contain a capped test port located adjacent to the transducer.

5. All pressure transducers, other than those controlling VAV boxes, shall be located in field device panels, not on the equipment monitored or on ductwork. Mount transducers in a location accessible for service without use of ladders or special equipment.

6. All air and water differential pressure sensors shall have gauge tees mounted adjacent to the taps. Water gauges shall also have shut-off valves installed before the tee.

K. Actuators 1. General. Mount and link control damper actuators according to manufacturer's

instructions. a. To compress seals when spring-return actuators are used on normally closed

dampers, power actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten the linkage.

b. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.

c. Provide all mounting hardware and linkages for actuator installation.

2. Electric/Electronic a. Dampers: Actuators shall be direct mounted on damper shaft or jackshaft unless

shown as a linkage installation. For low-leakage dampers with seals, the actuator



shall be mounted with a minimum 5° travel available for tightening the damper seal. Actuators shall be mounted following manufacturer’s recommendations.

b. Valves: Actuators shall be connected to valves with adapters approved by the actuator manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following the actuator manufacturer's recommendations.

L. Control Valve Installation 1. Valve submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, size, and piping configuration to

ensure compatibility with pipe design. 2. Slip-stem control valves shall be installed so that the stem position is not more than 60

degrees from the vertical up position. Ball type control valves shall be installed with the stem in the horizontal position.

3. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Control valves shall be installed so that they are accessible and serviceable and so that

actuators may be serviced and removed without interference from structure or other pipes and/or equipment.

5. Isolation valves shall be installed so that the control valve body may be serviced without draining the supply/return side piping system. Unions shall be installed at all connections to screw-type control valves.

6. Provide tags for all control valves indicating service and number. Tags shall be brass, 1.5 inch in diameter, with ¼ inch high letters. Securely fasten with chain and hook. Match identification numbers as shown on approved controls shop drawings.

M. Control Damper Installation 1. Damper submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, and size to ensure

compatibility with sheet metal design. 2. Duct openings shall be free of any obstruction or irregularities that might interfere with

blade or linkage rotation or actuator mounting. Duct openings shall measure ¼ in. larger than damper dimensions and shall be square, straight, and level.

3. Individual damper sections, as well as entire multiple section assemblies, must be completely square and free from racking, twisting, or bending. Measure diagonally from upper corners to opposite lower corners of each damper section. Both dimensions must be within 0.3 cm (1/8 in.) of each other.

4. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for field installation of control dampers. Unless specifically designed for vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted with blade axis horizontal.

5. Install extended shaft or jackshaft according to manufacturer’s instructions. (Typically, a sticker on the damper face shows recommended extended shaft location. Attach shaft on labeled side of damper to that blade.)

6. Damper blades, axles, and linkage must operate without binding. Before system operation, cycle damper after installation to ensure proper operation. On multiple section assemblies, all sections must open and close simultaneously.

7. Provide a visible and accessible indication of damper position on the drive shaft end. 8. Support ductwork in area of damper when required to prevent sagging due to damper

weight. 9. After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between frame and duct or

opening to prevent leakage around perimeter of damper.

N. Smoke detectors, high-pressure cut-offs and other safety switches shall be hard-wired to de-energize equipment as described in the sequence of operation. Switches shall require manual reset. Provide contacts that allow DDC software to monitor safety switch status.

O. All pipe-mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install liquid temperature sensors with heat-conducting fluid in thermal wells.



P. Fabricate openings and install sleeves in ceilings, floors, roof, and walls required by installation of products. Before proceeding with drilling, punching, and cutting, check for concealed work to avoid damage. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent condition.

Q. Welding Requirements: 1. Restrict welding and burning to supports and bracing. 2. No equipment shall be cut or welded without approval. Welding or cutting will not be

approved if there is risk of damage to adjacent Work. 3. Welding, where approved, shall be by inert-gas electric arc process and shall be

performed by qualified welders according to applicable welding codes. 4. If requested on-site, show satisfactory evidence of welder certificates indicating ability to

perform welding work intended.

R. Fastening Hardware: 1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that damage surfaces of rods, nuts, and other

parts are prohibited for work of assembling and tightening fasteners. 2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force

or by oversized wrenches. 3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

S. If product locations are not indicated, install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit service and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks without removal of permanently installed furniture and equipment.

T. Warning Labels 1. Permanent warning labels shall be affixed to all equipment that can be automatically

started by the control system. a. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background. b. Warning labels shall read as follows:

C A U T I O N

This equipment is operating under automatic control and may start or stop at any time without warning. Switch disconnect to"Off"position before servicing.

2. Permanent warning labels shall be affixed to all motor starters and control panels that are connected to multiple power sources utilizing separate disconnects. a. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background. b. Warning labels shall read as follows.

C A U T I O N This equipment is fed from more than one power source with separate disconnects. Disconnect all power

sources before servicing.

3.10 ROUTER INSTALLATION

A. Install routers if required for DDC system communication interface requirements indicated. 1. Install router(s) required to suit indicated requirements.

a. Accessible location. b. Protected from condensation and water.

B. Test router to verify that communication interface functions properly.



3.11 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION

A. Install controllers in enclosures to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Provide a separate controller for each AHU or other HVAC system. A DDC controller may control more than one system provided that all points associated with the system are assigned to the same DDC controller. Points used for control loop reset, such as outside air or space temperature, are exempt from this requirement.

C. Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide the required I/O point capacity required to monitor all of the hardware points listed in Section 23 09 93 (Sequences of Operation).

D. Connect controllers to field power supply and to UPS units where indicated.

E. Install controller with latest version of applicable software and configure to execute requirements indicated.

F. Test and adjust controllers to verify operation of connected I/O to achieve performance indicated requirements while executing sequences of operation.

G. Installation of Network Controllers: 1. Quantity and location of network controllers shall be determined by DDC system

manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated. 2. Install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators. 3. Top of controller shall be within 72 inches of finished floor.

H. Installation of Programmable Application Controllers: 1. Quantity and location of programmable application controllers shall be determined by

DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated. 2. Install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators. 3. Top of controller shall be within 72 inches of finished floor.

I. Application-Specific Controllers: 1. Quantity and location of application-specific controllers shall be determined by DDC

system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated. 2. For controllers not mounted directly on equipment being controlled, install controllers in a

protected location that is easily accessible by operators.

3.12 INSTALLATION OF WIRELESS ROUTERS FOR OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Install wireless routers to achieve optimum performance and best possible coverage.

B. Mount wireless routers in a protected location that is within 60 inches of floor and easily accessible by operators.

C. Connect wireless routers to field power supply and to UPS units if network controllers are powered through UPS units.

D. Install wireless router with latest version of applicable software and configure wireless router with WPA2 security and password protection. Create access password with not less than 12 characters consisting of letters and numbers and at least one special character. Document password in operations and maintenance manuals for reference by operators.



E. Test and adjust wireless routers for proper operation with portable workstation and other wireless devices intended for use by operators.

3.13 ENCLOSURES INSTALLATION

A. Install the following items in enclosures, to comply with indicated requirements: 1. Gateways. 2. Routers. 3. Controllers. 4. Electrical power devices. 5. UPS units. 6. Relays. 7. Accessories. 8. Instruments. 9. Actuators.

B. Attach wall-mounted enclosures to wall using the following types of steel struts: 1. For NEMA 250, Type 1 Enclosures: Use galvanized-steel strut and hardware. 2. Install plastic caps on exposed cut edges of strut.

C. Align top or bottom of adjacent enclosures of like size.

D. Attach enclosure legs using galvanized-steel anchors.

E. Install continuous and fully accessible wireways to connect conduit, wire, and cable to multiple adjacent enclosures. Wireway used for application shall have protection equal to NEMA 250 rating of connected enclosures.

3.14 ELECTRIC POWER CONNECTIONS

A. Connect electrical power to DDC system products requiring electrical power connections.

B. Design of electrical power to products not indicated with electric power is delegated to DDC system provider and installing trade. Work shall comply with NFPA 70 and other requirements indicated.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 262816 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for electrical power circuit breakers.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical power conductors and cables.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for electrical power raceways and boxes.

3.15 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals.

B. Install nameplate with unique identification on face for each of the following: 1. Operator workstation.



2. Server. 3. Printer. 4. Gateway. 5. Router. 6. Protocol analyzer. 7. DDC controller. 8. Enclosure. 9. Electrical power device. 10. UPS unit.

C. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with unique instrument identification on face of each instrument connected to a DDC controller.

D. Install Tag or nameplate with identification on face of each control damper and valve actuator connected to a DDC controller.

E. Where product is installed above accessible tile ceiling, also install matching engraved phenolic nameplate with identification on face of ceiling grid located directly below.

F. Where product is installed above an inaccessible ceiling, also install engraved phenolic nameplate with identification on face of access door directly below.

3.16 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING

A. All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels shall be labeled at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination with control system address or termination number.

B. All pneumatic tubing shall be labeled at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination with a descriptive identifier.

C. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served.

D. Identify control panels with minimum 1 cm (½ in.) letters on laminated plastic nameplates.

E. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. All plug-in components shall be labeled such that label removal of the component does not remove the label.

F. Identify room sensors related to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.

G. Manufacturers' nameplates and UL or CSA labels shall be visible and legible after equipment is installed.

H. Identifiers shall match record documents.

3.17 NETWORK INSTALLATION

A. Install fiber-optic cable when connecting between the following network devices and when located in different buildings on campus, or when distance between devices exceeds 1000 feet: 1. Operator workstations. 2. Operator workstations and network controllers. 3. Network controllers.



B. Install copper or fiber-optic cable when connecting between the following network devices located in same building: 1. Operator workstations. 2. Operator workstations and network controllers. 3. Network controllers.

C. Install copper cable when connecting between the following: 1. Gateways. 2. Gateways and network controllers or programmable application controllers. 3. Routers. 4. Routers and network controllers or programmable application controllers. 5. Network controllers and programmable application controllers. 6. Programmable application controllers. 7. Programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers. 8. Application-specific controllers.

D. Install network cable in continuous raceway. 1. Where indicated on Drawings, cable trays may be used for copper cable in lieu of

conduit.

3.18 NETWORK NAMING AND NUMBERING

A. Coordinate with Owner and provide unique naming and addressing for networks and devices.

B. ASHRAE 135 Networks: 1. MAC Address:

a. Every network device shall have an assigned and documented MAC address unique to its network.

b. Ethernet Networks: Document MAC address assigned at its creation. c. ARCNET or MS/TP networks: Assign from 00 to 64.

2. Network Numbering: a. Assign unique numbers to each new network. b. Provide ability for changing network number through device switches or operator

interface. c. DDC system, with all possible connected LANs, can contain up to 65,534 unique

networks. 3. Device Object Identifier Property Number:

a. Assign unique device object identifier property numbers or device instances for each device network.

b. Provide for future modification of device instance number by device switches or operator interface.

c. LAN shall support up to 4,194,302 unique devices. 4. Device Object Name Property Text:

a. Device object name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters. b. Assign unique device "Object Name" property names with plain-English descriptive

names for each device. 1) Example 1: Device object name for device controlling boiler plant at

Building 1000 would be "HW System B1000." 2) Example 2: Device object name for a VAV terminal unit controller could be

"VAV unit 102". 5. Object Name Property Text for Other Than Device Objects:

a. Object name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters. b. Assign object name properties with plain-English names descriptive of application.

1) Example 1: "Zone 1 Temperature."



2) Example 2 "Fan Start and Stop." 6. Object Identifier Property Number for Other Than Device Objects:

a. Assign object identifier property numbers according to Drawings indicated. b. If not indicated, object identifier property numbers may be assigned at Installer's

discretion but must be approved by Owner in advance, be documented and be unique for like object types within device.

3.19 CONTROL WIRE, CABLE AND RACEWAYS INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with TIA 568-C.1.

C. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for cable trays specified in Section 260536 "Cable Trays for

Electrical Systems." 3. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533

"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

D. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

E. Field Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

F. Conduit Installation: 1. Install conduit expansion joints where conduit runs exceed 200 feet, and conduit crosses

building expansion joints. 2. Coordinate conduit routing with other trades to avoid conflicts with ducts, pipes and

equipment and service clearance. 3. Maintain at least 3-inch separation where conduits run axially above or below ducts and

pipes. 4. Limit above-grade conduit runs to 100 feet without pull or junction box. 5. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls, or rotating

equipment. 6. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof. 7. Flexible conduit is permitted only where flexibility and vibration control is required. 8. Limit flexible conduit to 3 feet long. 9. Conduit shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, from outlet to enclosures, pull and

junction boxes, and shall be secured to boxes in such manner that each system shall be electrically continuous throughout.

10. Direct bury conduits underground or install in concrete-encased duct bank where indicated. a. Use rigid, nonmetallic, Schedule 80 PVC. b. Provide a burial depth according to NFPA 70, but not less than 24 inches.

11. Secure threaded conduit entering an instrument enclosure, cabinet, box, and trough, with a locknut on outside and inside, such that conduit system is electrically continuous throughout. Provide a metal bushing on inside with insulated throats. Locknuts shall be the type designed to bite into the metal or, on inside of enclosure, shall have a grounding wedge lug under locknut.



12. Conduit box-type connectors for conduit entering enclosures shall have an insulated throat.

13. Connect conduit entering enclosures in wet locations with box-type connectors or with watertight sealing locknuts or other fittings.

14. Offset conduits where entering surface-mounted equipment. 15. Seal conduit runs used by sealing fittings to prevent the circulation of air for the following:

a. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. b. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment. c. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to

maintain different pressure set points.

G. Wire and Cable Installation: 1. Cables serving a common system may be grouped in a common raceway. Install control

wiring and cable in separate raceway from power wiring. Do not group conductors from different systems or different voltages.

2. Install cables with protective sheathing that is waterproof and capable of withstanding continuous temperatures of 90 deg C with no measurable effect on physical and electrical properties of cable. a. Provide shielding to prevent interference and distortion from adjacent cables and

equipment. 3. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent

bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 4. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

5. UTP Cable Installation: a. Comply with TIA 568-C.2. b. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination, to

maintain cable geometry. 6. Identify each wire on each end and at each terminal with a number-coded identification

tag. Each wire shall have a unique tag. 7. Provide strain relief. 8. Terminate wiring in a junction box.

a. Clamp cable over jacket in junction box. b. Individual conductors in the stripped section of the cable shall be slack between

the clamping point and terminal block. 9. Terminate field wiring and cable not directly connected to instruments and control devices

having integral wiring terminals using terminal blocks. 10. Install signal transmission components according to IEEE C2, REA Form 511a, NFPA 70,

and as indicated. 11. Keep runs short. Allow extra length for connecting to terminal boards. Do not bend

flexible coaxial cables in a radius less than 10 times the cable OD. Use sleeves or grommets to protect cables from vibration at points where they pass around sharp corners and through penetrations.

12. Ground wire shall be copper and grounding methods shall comply with IEEE C2. Demonstrate ground resistance.

13. Wire and cable shall be continuous from terminal to terminal without splices. 14. Use insulated spade lugs for wire and cable connection to screw terminals. 15. Use shielded cable to transmitters. 16. Use shielded cable to temperature sensors. 17. Perform continuity and meager testing on wire and cable after installation. 18. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded wire and cable. Remove and

discard wire and cable if damaged during installation, and replace it with new cable. 19. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps

shall not be used for heating.



20. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

21. Protection from Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI): Provide installation free of (EMI). As a minimum, comply with the following requirements: a. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA 569-C for separating unshielded cable from

potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. b. Separation between open cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and

unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: 1) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. 2) Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. 3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

c. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: 1) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. 2) Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

d. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: 1) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. 2) Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. 3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

e. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

f. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

3.20 COMMUNICATION WIRING

A. All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication cabling

B. Do not install communication wiring in raceways and enclosures containing Class 1 or other Class 2 wiring.

C. Maximum pulling, tension, and bend radius for the cable installation, as specified by the cable manufacturer, shall not be exceeded during installation.

D. Contractor shall verify the integrity of the entire network following cable installation. Use appropriate test measures for each particular cable.

E. When a cable enters or exits a building, a lightning arrestor must be installed between the lines and ground. The lighting arrestor shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions.

F. All runs of communication wiring shall be unspliced length when that length is commercially available.

G. All communication wiring shall be labeled to indicate origination and destination data.

H. All communication wiring shall be labeled to indicate origination and destination data.

I. Grounding of coaxial cable shall be in accordance with NEC regulations article on "Communications Circuits, Cable, and Protector Grounding."



J. BACnet MS/TP communications wiring shall be installed in accordance with ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 135. This includes but is not limited to: 1. The network shall use shielded, twisted-pair cable with characteristic impedance between

100 and 120 ohms. Distributed capacitance between conductors shall be less than 100 pF per meter (30 pF per foot.)

2. The maximum length of an MS/TP segment is 1200 meters (4000 ft) with AWG 18 cable. The use of greater distances and/or different wire gauges shall comply with the electrical specifications of EIA-485.

3. The maximum number of nodes per segment shall be 32, as specified in the EIA 485 standard. Additional nodes may be accommodated by the use of repeaters.

4. An MS/TP EIA-485 network shall have no T connections.

3.21 FIBER-OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TIA 568-C.3, except where requirements indicated are more stringent.

B. All cabling and associated components shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Minimum cable and unjacketed fiber bend radii, as specified by cable manufacturer, shall be maintained.

C. Raceway Installation: 1. Install continuous raceway for routing fiber-optic cables. 2. Install raceways continuously between pull boxes and junction boxes. Raceways shall

enter and be secured to enclosures. 3. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be

according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved.

4. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. Use long radius elbows for all fiber-optic cables.

5. Entire raceway shall be complete and raceway interior cleaned before installation of fiber-optic cables.

6. Securely fasten raceway to building structure using clamps and clips designed for purpose.

7. Install nylon or polyethylene pulling line in raceways. Clearly label as "pulling line," indicating source and destination.

D. Fiber-Optic Cable Installation: 1. Route cables as efficiently as possible, minimizing amount of cable required. 2. Maximum pulling tensions as specified by the cable manufacturer shall not be exceeded

during installation. Post-installation residual cable tension shall be within cable manufacturer's specifications.

3. Continuously lubricate cables during pulling-in process. 4. Do not exceed maximum pulling tensions provided by cable manufacturer. Monitor cable

pulling tension with a mechanical tension meter. 5. Arrange cables passing through pull boxes to obtain maximum clearance among cables

within box. 6. As cables emerge from intermediate point pull boxes, coil cable in a figure eight pattern

with loops not less than 24 inches in diameter. 7. Terminate fiber-optic cables in a fiber-optic splice organizer cabinet, unless connected

equipment can accept fiber-optic cables directly. Terminate cables with connectors. 8. Install and connect appropriate opto-electronic equipment and fiber jumper cables

between opto-electronic equipment and fiber-optic cable system to DDC system fiber-optic cable system. Verify interface compatibility.



E. Cable and Raceway Identification: 1. Label cables at both ends. Labels shall be typed, not handwritten. 2. Mark raceways at each pull box indicating the type and number of cables within.

3.22 PROGRAMMING 1. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified sequences of operation and trend

logging. 2. Point Naming. Name points as shown on the equipment points list provided with each

sequence of operation. See Section 23 09 93 (Sequences of Operation). If character limitations or space restrictions make it advisable to shorten the name, the abbreviations given in Appendix B to Section 23 09 93 may be used. Where multiple points with the same name reside in the same controller, each point name may be customized with its associated Program Object number. For example, "Zone Temp 1" for Zone 1, "Zone Temp 2" for Zone 2.

3. Software Programming. a. Provide programming for the system and adhere to the sequences of operation

provided. All other system programming necessary for the operation of the system, but not specified in this document, also shall be provided by the contractor. Embed into the control program sufficient comment statements to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequences of operation. Use the appropriate technique based on the following programming types: 1) Text-based:

a) Must provide actions for all possible situations b) Must be modular and structured c) Must be commented

2) Graphic-based: a) Must provide actions for all possible situations b) Must be documented

3) Parameter-based: a) Must provide actions for all possible situations b) Must be documented.

4. Operator Interface. a. Standard Graphics. Provide graphics for all mechanical systems and floor plans of

the building. This includes each chilled water system, hot water system, chiller, boiler, air handler, and all terminal equipment. Point information on the graphic displays shall dynamically update. Show on each graphic all input and output points for the system. Also show relevant calculated points such as setpoints. As a minimum, show on each equipment graphic the input and output points and relevant calculated points as indicated on the applicable Points List in Section 23 09 93.

b. The contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start up, and troubleshoot all operator interface software and its functions as described in this section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface database, and any third-party software installation and integration required for successful operation of the operator interface.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and installations, including connections.



C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Verify that all control wiring is properly connected and free of all shorts and ground faults.

Verify that terminations are tight. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Startup Testing. All testing listed in this article shall be performed by the contractor and shall make up part of the necessary verification of an operating control system. This testing shall be completed before the owner’s representative is notified of the system demonstration.

E. Testing: 1. The contractor shall furnish all labor and test apparatus required to calibrate and prepare

for service of all instruments, controls, and accessory equipment furnished under this specification.

2. Perform pre-installation, in-progress, and final tests, supplemented by additional tests, as necessary.

3. Pre-installation Cable Verification: Verify integrity and serviceability for new cable lengths before installation. This assurance may be provided by using vendor verification documents, testing, or other methods. As a minimum, furnish evidence of verification for cable attenuation and bandwidth parameters.

4. In-Progress Testing: Perform standard tests for correct pair identification and termination during installation to ensure proper installation and cable placement. Perform tests in addition to those specified if there is any reason to question condition of material furnished and installed. Testing accomplished is to be documented by agency conducting tests. Submit test results for Project record.

5. Enable the control systems and verify calibration of all input devices individually. Perform calibration procedures according to manufacturers’ recommendations.

6. Verify that all binary output devices (relays, solenoid valves, two-position actuators and control valves, magnetic starters, etc.) operate properly and that the normal positions are correct.

7. Verify that all analog output devices (I/Ps, actuators, etc.) are functional, that start and span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct. The contractor shall check all control valves and automatic dampers to ensure proper action and closure. The contractor shall make any necessary adjustments to valve stem and damper blade travel.

8. Verify that the system operation adheres to the sequences of operation. Simulate and observe all modes of operation by overriding and varying inputs and schedules. Tune all DDC loops.

9. Alarms and Interlocks: a. Check each alarm separately by including an appropriate signal at a value that will

trip the alarm. b. Interlocks shall be tripped using field contacts to check the logic, as well as to

ensure that the fail-safe condition for all actuators is in the proper direction. c. Interlock actions shall be tested by simulating alarm conditions to check the

initiating value of the variable and interlock action 10. Final Testing: Perform final test of installed system to demonstrate acceptability as

installed. Testing shall be performed according to a test plan supplied by DDC system manufacturer. Defective Work or material shall be corrected and retested. As a minimum, final testing for cable system, including spare cable, shall verify conformance of attenuation, length, and bandwidth parameters with performance indicated.

11. Test Equipment: Use a fiber-optic time domain reflectometer for testing of length and optical connectivity.

12. Test Results: Record test results and submit copy of test results for Project record.



3.24 DDC SYSTEM I/O CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests and calibration.

B. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.

C. Check instruments for proper installation on direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact performance.

D. Control Damper Checkout: 1. For pneumatic dampers, verify that pressure gages are provided in each air line to

damper actuator and positioner. 2. Verify that control dampers are installed correctly for flow direction. 3. Verify that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 4. Verify that damper frame attachment is properly secured and sealed. 5. Verify that damper actuator and linkage attachment is secure. 6. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed and connected to correct power source. 7. Verify that damper blade travel is unobstructed.

E. Control Valve Checkout: 1. For pneumatic valves, verify that pressure gages are provided in each air line to valve

actuator and positioner. 2. Verify that control valves are installed correctly for flow direction. 3. Verify that valve body attachment is properly secured and sealed. 4. Verify that valve actuator and linkage attachment is secure. 5. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed and connected to correct power source. 6. Verify that valve ball, disc or plug travel is unobstructed. 7. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before insulating and

balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace the valve if leaks persist.

F. Instrument Checkout: 1. Verify that instrument is correctly installed for location, orientation, direction and operating

clearances. 2. Verify that attachment is properly secured and sealed. 3. Verify that conduit connections are properly secured and sealed. 4. Verify that wiring is properly labeled with unique identification, correct type and size and

is securely attached to proper terminals. 5. Inspect instrument tag against approved submittal. 6. For instruments with tubing connections, verify that tubing attachment is secure and

isolation valves have been provided. 7. For flow instruments, verify that recommended upstream and downstream distances

have been maintained. 8. For temperature instruments:

a. Verify sensing element type and proper material. b. Verify length and insertion.

3.25 DDC SYSTEM I/O ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION AND TESTING:

A. Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with calibration documentation.

B. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall comply with instrument manufacturer's written instructions.



C. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment.

D. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed instruments shall have accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. An installed instrument with an accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument with an accuracy of 0.5 percent.

E. Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by manufacturer.

F. If after calibration indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance instruments.

G. Comply with field testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE's Guideline 11, "Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific requirements, and to supplement requirements indicated.

H. Analog Signals: 1. Check analog voltage signals using a precision voltage meter at zero, 50, and 100

percent. 2. Check analog current signals using a precision current meter at zero, 50, and 100

percent. 3. Check resistance signals for temperature sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of

operating span using a precision-resistant source.

I. Digital Signals: 1. Check digital signals using a jumper wire. 2. Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.

J. Control Dampers: 1. Stroke and adjust control dampers following manufacturer's recommended procedure,

from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed and back to 100 percent open. 2. Stroke control dampers with pilot positioners. Adjust damper and positioner following

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so damper is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed and 100 percent open at proper air pressure.

3. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time less than 30 seconds.

4. For control dampers equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.

K. Control Valves: 1. Stroke and adjust control valves following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from

100 percent open to 100 percent closed and back to 100 percent open. 2. Stroke control valves with pilot positioners. Adjust valve and positioner following

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so valve is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed and 100 percent open at proper air pressures.

3. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time less than 30 seconds.

4. For control valves equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.

L. Meters: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

M. Sensors: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

N. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated.



O. Transmitters: 1. Check and calibrate transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values. 2. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of span using

a precision-resistant source.

3.26 DDC SYSTEM CONTROLLER CHECKOUT

A. Verify power supply. 1. Verify voltage, phase and hertz. 2. Verify that protection from power surges is installed and functioning. 3. Verify that ground fault protection is installed. 4. If applicable, verify if connected to UPS unit. 5. If applicable, verify if connected to a backup power source. 6. If applicable, verify that power conditioning units, transient voltage suppression and high-

frequency noise filter units are installed.

B. Verify that wire and cabling is properly secured to terminals and labeled with unique identification.

C. Verify that spare I/O capacity is provided.

3.27 DDC CONTROLLER I/O CONTROL LOOP TESTS

A. Testing: 1. Test every I/O point connected to DDC controller to verify that safety and operating

control set points are as indicated and as required to operate controlled system safely and at optimum performance.

2. Test every I/O point throughout its full operating range. 3. Test every control loop to verify operation is stable and accurate. 4. Adjust control loop proportional, integral and derivative settings to achieve optimum

performance while complying with performance requirements indicated. Document testing of each control loop's precision and stability via trend logs.

5. Test and adjust every control loop for proper operation according to sequence of operation.

6. Test software and hardware interlocks for proper operation. Correct deficiencies. 7. Operate each analog point at the following:

a. Upper quarter of range. b. Lower quarter of range. c. At midpoint of range.

8. Exercise each binary point. 9. For every I/O point in DDC system, read and record each value at operator workstation,

at DDC controller and at field instrument simultaneously. Value displayed at operator workstation, at DDC controller and at field instrument shall match.

10. Prepare and submit a report documenting results for each I/O point in DDC system and include in each I/O point a description of corrective measures and adjustments made to achieve desire results.

3.28 DDC SYSTEM VALIDATION TESTS

A. Perform validation tests before requesting final review of system.



B. After testing is complete, submit completed test checklist.

C. Pretest Checklist: Submit the following list with items checked off once verified: 1. Detailed explanation for any items that are not completed or verified. 2. Required mechanical installation work is successfully completed and HVAC equipment is

working correctly. 3. HVAC equipment motors operate below full-load amperage ratings. 4. Required DDC system components, wiring, and accessories are installed. 5. Installed DDC system architecture matches approved Drawings. 6. Control electric power circuits operate at proper voltage and are free from faults. 7. Required surge protection is installed. 8. DDC system network communications function properly, including uploading and

downloading programming changes. 9. Using BACnet protocol analyzer, verify that communications are error free. 10. Each controller's programming is backed up. 11. Equipment, products, tubing, wiring cable and conduits are properly labeled. 12. All I/O points are programmed into controllers. 13. Testing, adjusting and balancing work affecting controls is complete. 14. Dampers and actuators zero and span adjustments are set properly. 15. Each control damper and actuator goes to failed position on loss of power. 16. Valves and actuators zero and span adjustments are set properly. 17. Each control valve and actuator goes to failed position on loss of power. 18. Meter, sensor and transmitter readings are accurate and calibrated. 19. Control loops are tuned for smooth and stable operation. 20. View trend data where applicable. 21. Each controller works properly in standalone mode. 22. Safety controls and devices function properly. 23. Interfaces with fire-alarm system function properly. 24. Electrical interlocks function properly. 25. Operator workstations and other interfaces are delivered, all system and database

software is installed, and graphic are created. 26. Record Drawings are completed.

D. Validation Test: 1. Verify operating performance of each I/O point in DDC system.

a. Verify analog I/O points at operating value. b. Make adjustments to out-of-tolerance I/O points.

1) Identify I/O points for future reference. 2) Simulate abnormal conditions to demonstrate proper function of safety

devices. 3) Replace instruments and controllers that cannot maintain performance

indicated after adjustments. 2. Simulate conditions to demonstrate proper sequence of control. 3. Readjust settings to design values and observe ability of DDC system to establish

desired conditions. 4. After 24 Hours following Initial Validation Test:

a. Re-check I/O points that required corrections during initial test. b. Identify I/O points that still require additional correction and make corrections

necessary to achieve desired results. 5. After 24 Hours of Second Validation Test:

a. Re-check I/O points that required corrections during second test. b. Continue validation testing until I/O point is normal on two consecutive tests.

6. Completely check out, calibrate, and test all connected hardware and software to ensure that DDC system performs according to requirements indicated.



7. After validation testing is complete, prepare and submit a report indicating all I/O points that required correction and how many validation re-tests it took to pass. Identify adjustments made for each test and indicate instruments that were replaced.

E. DDC System Response Time Test: 1. Simulate HLC.

a. Heavy load shall be an occurrence of 25 percent of total connected binary COV, one-half of which represent an "alarm" condition, and 25 percent of total connected analog COV, one-half of which represent an "alarm" condition, that are initiated simultaneously on a one-time basis.

2. Initiate 10 successive occurrences of HLC and measure response time to typical alarms and status changes.

3. Measure with a timer having at least 0.1-second resolution and 0.01 percent accuracy. 4. Purpose of test is to demonstrate DDC system, as follows:

a. Reaction to COV and alarm conditions during HLC. b. Ability to update DDC system database during HLC.

5. Passing test is contingent on the following: a. Alarm reporting at printer beginning no more than two seconds after the initiation

(time zero) of HLC. b. All alarms, both binary and analog, are reported and printed; none are lost. c. Compliance with response times specified.

6. Prepare and submit a report documenting HLC tested and results of test including time stamp and print out of all alarms.

F. DDC System Network Bandwidth Test: 1. Test network bandwidth usage on all DDC system networks to demonstrate bandwidth

usage under DDC system normal operating conditions and under simulated HLC. 2. To pass, none of DDC system networks shall use more than 70 percent of available

bandwidth under normal and HLC operation.

3.29 FINAL REVIEW

A. Submit written request to Construction Manager when DDC system is ready for final review. Written request shall state the following: 1. DDC system has been thoroughly inspected for compliance with contract documents and

found to be in full compliance. 2. DDC system has been calibrated, adjusted and tested and found to comply with

requirements of operational stability, accuracy, speed and other performance requirements indicated.

3. DDC system monitoring and control of HVAC systems results in operation according to sequences of operation indicated.

4. DDC system is complete and ready for final review.

B. Review by Construction Manager shall be made after receipt of written request. A field report shall be issued to document observations and deficiencies.

C. Take prompt action to remedy deficiencies indicated in field report and submit a second written request when all deficiencies have been corrected. Repeat process until no deficiencies are reported.

D. Should more than two reviews be required, DDC system manufacturer and Installer shall compensate entity performing review for total costs, labor and expenses, associated with third and subsequent reviews. Estimated cost of each review shall be submitted and approved by DDC system manufacturer and Installer before making the review.



E. Prepare and submit closeout submittals when no deficiencies are reported.

F. A part of DDC system final review shall include a demonstration to parties participating in final review. 1. Provide staff familiar with DDC system installed to demonstrate operation of DDC system

during final review. 2. Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Accuracy and calibration of 20 I/O points randomly selected by reviewers. If review finds that some I/O points are not properly calibrated and not satisfying performance requirements indicated, additional I/O points may be selected by reviewers until total I/O points being reviewed that satisfy requirements equals quantity indicated.

b. HVAC equipment and system hardwired and software safeties and life-safety functions are operating according to sequence of operation. Up to 20 I/O points shall be randomly selected by reviewers. Additional I/O points may be selected by reviewers to discover problems with operation.

c. Correct sequence of operation after electrical power interruption and resumption after electrical power is restored for randomly selected HVAC systems.

d. Operation of randomly selected dampers and valves in normal-on, normal-off and failed positions.

e. Reporting of alarm conditions for randomly selected alarms, including different classes of alarms, to ensure that alarms are properly received by operators and operator workstations.

f. Trends, summaries, logs and reports set-up for Project. g. For up to three HVAC systems randomly selected by reviewers, use graph trends

to show that sequence of operation is executed in correct manner and that HVAC systems operate properly through complete sequence of operation including different modes of operations indicated. Show that control loops are stable and operating at set points and respond to changes in set point of 20 percent or more.

h. Software's ability to communicate with controllers, operator workstations, uploading and downloading of control programs.

i. Software's ability to edit control programs off-line. j. Data entry to show Project-specific customizing capability including parameter

changes. k. Step through penetration tree, display all graphics, demonstrate dynamic update,

and direct access to graphics. l. Execution of digital and analog commands in graphic mode. m. Spreadsheet and curve plot software and its integration with database. n. Online user guide and help functions. o. Multitasking by showing different operations occurring simultaneously on four

quadrants of split screen. p. System speed of response compared to requirements indicated. q. For Each Network and Programmable Application Controller:

1) Memory: Programmed data, parameters, trend and alarm history collected during normal operation is not lost during power failure.

2) Operator Interface: Ability to connect directly to each type of digital controller with a portable operator workstation and PDA. Show that maintenance personnel interface tools perform as indicated in manufacturer's technical literature.

3) Standalone Ability: Demonstrate that controllers provide stable and reliable standalone operation using default values or other method for values normally read over network.

4) Electric Power: Ability to disconnect any controller safely from its power source.

5) Wiring Labels: Match control drawings.



6) Network Communication: Ability to locate a controller's location on network and communication architecture matches Shop Drawings.

7) Nameplates and Tags: Accurate and permanently attached to control panel doors, instrument, actuators and devices.

r. For Each Operator Workstation: 1) I/O points lists agree with naming conventions. 2) Graphics are complete. 3) UPS unit, if applicable, operates.

s. Communications and Interoperability: Demonstrate proper interoperability of data sharing, alarm and event management, trending, scheduling, and device and network management. Requirements must be met even if only one manufacturer's equipment is installed. 1) Data Presentation: On each operator workstation, demonstrate graphic

display capabilities. 2) Reading of Any Property: Demonstrate ability to read and display any used

readable object property of any device on network. 3) Set Point and Parameter Modifications: Show ability to modify set points and

tuning parameters indicated. 4) Peer-to-Peer Data Exchange: Network devices are installed and configured

to perform without need for operator intervention to implement Project sequence of operation and to share global data.

5) Alarm and Event Management: Alarms and events are installed and prioritized according to Owner. Demonstrate that time delays and other logic are set up to avoid nuisance tripping. Show that operators with sufficient privileges are permitted.

6) Schedule Lists: Schedules are configured for start and stop, mode change, occupant overrides, and night setback as defined in sequence of operations.

7) Schedule Display and Modification: Ability to display any schedule with start and stop times for calendar year. Show that all calendar entries and schedules are modifiable from any connected operator workstation by an operator with sufficient privilege.

8) Archival Storage of Data: Data archiving is handled by operator workstation and server and local trend archiving and display is accomplished.

9) Modification of Trend Log Object Parameters: Operator with sufficient privilege can change logged data points, sampling rate, and trend duration.

10) Device and Network Management: a) Display of network device status. b) Display of BACnet Object Information. c) Silencing devices transmitting erroneous data. d) Time synchronization. e) Remote device re-initialization. f) Backup and restore network device programming and master

database(s). g) Configuration management of routers..

3.30 EXTENDED OPERATION TEST

A. Extended operation test is intended to simulate normal operation of DDC system by Owner.

B. Operate DDC system for an operating period of 28 consecutive calendar days following Substantial Completion. Coordinate exact start date of testing with Owner.



C. During operating period, DDC system shall demonstrate correct operation and accuracy of monitored and controlled points as well as operation capabilities of sequences, logs, trends, reports, specialized control algorithms, diagnostics, and other software indicated. 1. Correct defects of hardware and software when it occurs.

D. Definition of Failures and Downtime during Operating Period: 1. Failed I/O point constituting downtime is an I/O point failing to perform its intended

function consistently and a point physically failed due to hardware and software. 2. Downtime is when any I/O point in DDC system is unable to fulfill its' required function. 3. Downtime shall be calculated as elapsed time between a detected point failure as

confirmed by an operator and time point is restored to service. 4. Maximum time interval allowed between DDC system detection of failure occurrence and

operator confirmation shall be 0.5 hours. 5. Downtime shall be logged in hours to nearest 0.1 hour. 6. Power outages shall not count as downtime, but shall suspend test hours unless systems

are provided with UPS and served through a backup power source. 7. Hardware or software failures caused by power outages shall count as downtime.

E. During operating period, log downtime and operational problems are encountered. 1. Identify source of problem. 2. Provide written description of corrective action taken. 3. Record duration of downtime. 4. Maintain log showing the following:

a. Time of occurrence. b. Description of each occurrence and pertinent written comments for reviewer to

understand scope and extent of occurrence. c. Downtime for each failed I/O point. d. Running total of downtime and total time of I/O point after each problem has been

restored. 5. Log shall be available to Owner for review at any time.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.31 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.32 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by DDC system manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include semiannual preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, cleaning, calibration and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

3.33 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two year(s).



B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software.

3.34 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative with complete knowledge of Project-specific system installed to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain DDC system.

B. Extent of Training: 1. Base extent of training on scope and complexity of DDC system indicated and training

requirements indicated. Provide extent of training required to satisfy requirements indicated even if more than minimum training requirements are indicated.

2. Inform Owner of anticipated training requirements if more than minimum training requirements are indicated.

3. Minimum Training Requirements: a. Provide not less than 8 hours of training total. b. Stagger training over multiple training classes to accommodate Owner's

requirements. All training shall occur before end of warranty period.

C. Training Schedule: 1. Schedule training with Owner 20 business days before expected Substantial Completion. 2. Training shall occur within normal business hours at a mutually agreed on time. Unless

otherwise agreed to, training shall occur Monday through Friday. 3. Provide staggered training schedule as requested by Owner.

D. Training Attendee List and Sign-in Sheet: 1. Request from Owner in advance of training a proposed attendee list with name, phone

number and e-mail address. 2. Provide a preprinted sign-in sheet for each training session with proposed attendees

listed and no fewer than six blank spaces to add additional attendees. 3. Circulate sign-in sheet at beginning of each session and solicit attendees to sign or initial

in applicable location.

E. Training Attendee Headcount: 1. Plan in advance of training for five attendees.

F. Attendee Training Manuals: 1. Provide each attendee with a color hard copy of all training materials and visual

presentations. 2. Hard-copy materials shall be organized in a three-ring binder with table of contents and

individual divider tabs marked for each logical grouping of subject matter. Organize material to provide space for attendees to take handwritten notes within training manuals.

3. In addition to hard-copy materials included in training manual, provide each binder with a sleeve or pocket that includes a DVD or flash drive with PDF copy of all hard-copy materials.

G. Instructor Requirements: 1. One or multiple qualified instructors, as required, to provide training.

H. Training Outline:



1. Submit training outline for Owner review at least 10 business day before scheduling training.

2. Outline shall include a detailed agenda for each training day that is broken down into each of four training sessions that day, training objectives for each training session and synopses for each lesson planned.

I. On-Site Training:

1. Instructor shall provide training materials, projector and other audiovisual equipment used in training.

2. Provide as much of training located on-site as deemed feasible and practical by Owner. 3. On-site training shall include regular walk-through tours, as required, to observe each

unique product type installed with hands-on review of operation, calibration and service requirements.

4. Operator workstation provided with DDC system shall be used in training. If operator workstation is not indicated, provide a temporary workstation to convey training content.

J. Training Content for Daily Operators: 1. Basic operation of system. 2. Understanding DDC system architecture and configuration. 3. Understanding each unique product type installed including performance and service

requirements for each. 4. Understanding operation of each system and equipment controlled by DDC system

including sequences of operation, each unique control algorithm and each unique optimization routine.

5. Operating operator workstations, printers and other peripherals. 6. Logging on and off system. 7. Accessing graphics, reports and alarms. 8. Adjusting and changing set points and time schedules. 9. Recognizing DDC system malfunctions. 10. Understanding content of operation and maintenance manuals including control

drawings. 11. Understanding physical location and placement of DDC controllers and I/O hardware. 12. Accessing data from DDC controllers. 13. Operating portable operator workstations. 14. Review of DDC testing results to establish basic understanding of DDC system operating

performance and HVAC system limitations as of Substantial Completion. 15. Running each specified report and log. 16. Displaying and demonstrating each data entry to show Project-specific customizing

capability. Demonstrating parameter changes. 17. Stepping through graphics penetration tree, displaying all graphics, demonstrating

dynamic updating, and direct access to graphics. 18. Executing digital and analog commands in graphic mode. 19. Demonstrating control loop precision and stability via trend logs of I/O for not less than 10

percent of I/O installed. 20. Demonstrating DDC system performance through trend logs and command tracing. 21. Demonstrating scan, update, and alarm responsiveness. 22. Demonstrating spreadsheet and curve plot software, and its integration with database. 23. Demonstrating on-line user guide, and help function and mail facility. 24. Demonstrating multitasking by showing dynamic curve plot, and graphic construction

operating simultaneously via split screen. 25. Demonstrating the following for HVAC systems and equipment controlled by DDC

system:



a. Operation of HVAC equipment in normal-off, -on and failed conditions while observing individual equipment, dampers and valves for correct position under each condition.

b. For HVAC equipment with factory-installed software, show that integration into DDC system is able to communicate with DDC controllers or gateways, as applicable.

c. Using graphed trends, show that sequence of operation is executed in correct manner, and HVAC systems operate properly through complete sequence of operation including seasonal change, occupied and unoccupied modes, warm-up and cool-down cycles and other modes of operation indicated.

d. Hardware interlocks and safeties function properly and DDC system performs correct sequence of operation after electrical power interruption and resumption after power is restored.

e. Reporting of alarm conditions for each alarm, and confirm that alarms are received at assigned locations, including operator workstations.

f. Each control loop responds to set point adjustment and stabilizes within time period indicated.

g. Sharing of previously graphed trends of all control loops to demonstrate that each control loop is stable and set points are being maintained.

K. Training Content for Advanced Operators: 1. Making and changing workstation graphics. 2. Creating, deleting and modifying alarms including annunciation and routing. 3. Creating, deleting and modifying point trend logs including graphing and printing on an

ad-hoc basis and operator-defined time intervals. 4. Creating, deleting and modifying reports. 5. Creating, deleting and modifying points. 6. Creating, deleting and modifying programming including ability to edit control programs

off-line. 7. Creating, deleting and modifying system graphics and other types of displays. 8. Adding DDC controllers and other network communication devices such as gateways and

routers. 9. Adding operator workstations. 10. Performing DDC system checkout and diagnostic procedures. 11. Performing DDC controllers operation and maintenance procedures. 12. Performing operator workstation operation and maintenance procedures. 13. Configuring DDC system hardware including controllers, workstations, communication

devices and I/O points. 14. Maintaining, calibrating, troubleshooting, diagnosing and repairing hardware. 15. Adjusting, calibrating and replacing DDC system components.

L. Video of Training Sessions: 1. Provide a digital video and audio recording of each training session. Create a separate

recording file for each session. 2. Stamp each recording file with training session number, session name and date. 3. Provide Owner with two copies of digital files on DVDs or flash drives for later reference

and for use in future training. 4. Owner retains right to make additional copies for intended training purposes without

having to pay royalties.



INSTRUMENTATION 230951 - 1

SECTION 230951 - INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies pressure gages, thermometers and test plugs.


A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

ASTM A276-92 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes. ASME B40.1-91 Gages - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element. ASME SEC VII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels. ASTM E1-91a Specification for ASTM Thermometers. SAMA PMC17-10-63 Bushings and Wells for Temperature Sensing Elements.


A. Submit documents under the provisions of Section 23 00 00.

B. Accurately record actual locations of instrumentation installation.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Trerice Model 450. 2. Ashcroft Duragage Figure 1279. 3. Ametek 1981L.

B. Pressure gages shall be of the 4-1/2” dial size with fiberglass reinforced polypropelyne or stainless steel flangeless case, threaded ring, solid front, blow out back, molded acrylic window. Movement shall be stainless steel rotary type. Bourdon tube shall be 316 stainless steel with 316 stainless steel socket. Dial face shall be white with black figures, pointer shall be micrometer adjustable type.



C. Gage shall have ¼” NPT connection.

D. Accuracy shall be 0.5% of the scale range, ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A.

2.2 PRESSURE GAGE TAPS

A. Gage Cock: Robertshaw 1303, Ashcroft 1095, or equal by Trerice. Brass construction for maximum 150 psig with lever handle. The exposed threads of each gage cock shall be protected by a brass plug.

B. Pulsation Damper: Trerice No. 872 pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch connections.

C. Syphon: Brass, 1/4 inch angle or straight pattern.

2.3 DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Trerice B85600 Series. 2. Ametek. 3. Trend Instruments, Inc Model 52

B. ASTM E1, 5 inch diameter bimetallic dial with stainless steel case and stem, universal adjustable angle with external recalibration, hermetically sealed, silicone fluid damping, white with black markings and black pointer, Lexan lens, 1.0% of full scale accuracy, single scale in oF.

C. Pipeline thermometers shall be provided with threaded thermowell mountings, designed to permit removal of the thermometer without depressurization or loss of process fluid.

D. Where insulation exceeds 2”, a longer sensing bulb shall be used with an extension neck separable well.

E. Thermometers for measuring fluid temperatures shall have sensing bulbs with insertion lengths roughly half the pipe diameter; minimum shall be 2”. Thermometers installed on tanks shall have 5-1/2” minimum insertion length.

2.4 THERMOWELLS

A. Pipeline thermometers and temperature sensors shall be installed in threaded thermowell mountings, designed to permit removal of the thermometer without depressurization or loss of process fluid. Bushings and wells for temperature elements shall comply with SAMA PMC17-10 and unless otherwise specified, shall be machined from ASTM A276, type 316 stainless steel bar stock.

B. Install all liquid thermometers and temperature sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermowell.

C. For insulated pipes, a thermowell with lagging extension shall be provided.



2.5 TEST PLUGS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Peterson Equipment Company, Inc. PeteÆs Plug. 2. Sisco P/T Plugs. 3. Waymire.

B. Test Plug: 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch brass fitting and gasketed cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with viton core for temperatures up to 400oF, Nordel core for temperatures up to 275oF.

C. Test Kit: Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing one 2-1/2 inch diameter pressure gages, two gage adapters with 1/8 inch probes, two one inch dial thermometers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with other trades per the provisions of the general conditions.

B. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inch for installation of thermometer sockets. For insulated pipes a thermowell with a lagging extension shall be provided. For piping less than 4 inches diameter, temperature elements shall be installed at a pipe elbow if possible. Where an elbow is not available, a wye fitting shall be installed in the pipe for installation of the temperature element at a 45o angle with the flow.

C. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges.

D. Install local readout thermometer sockets adjacent to controls system temperature transmitter or sensor sockets. Refer to Section 23 05 19.

E. Locate duct mounted thermometers a minimum of 10 feet downstream of mixing dampers, coils, or other devices causing air turbulence.

F. Spread evenly capillary on remote element instruments.

G. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they can be read from normal operating level.

H. Provide test plugs where indicated. Contractor shall provide two test plug test kits to the College prior to Completion.

3.2 CALIBRATION

A. After the instruments are installed, the Contractor shall test the calibration of all the instruments. This work shall not be considered as complete work unless properly signed certification sheets have been transmitted to the College. Cautious operation of the instruments shall be done immediately before calibration tests but not exceeding manufacturer’s recommendations.



B. The calibration documentation transmitted College shall include all indicating instruments without signals, such as pressure gauges, dial thermometers, etc. shall be tested at three points.

C. Calibration instruments and methods shall be acceptable to the College and manufacturer as meeting the standard of quality required to calibrate the sensor(s).

3.3 INSTRUMENTATION SCHEDULES: The following schedules are intended to supplement the Drawings and Instrument Index (The Instrument Index does not include instrumentation to be provided in existing buildings - refer to the Drawings).

A. Pressure Gage Locations: 1. At the CHW/HHW entrance of the building in the mechanical room 2. AHU Coil Banks – inlets and outlets 3. And all locations indicated on the Drawings

B. Thermometer Locations: 1. At the CHW/HHW entrance of the building in the mechanical room 2. And all locations indicated on the Drawings

C. Test Plug Locations: 1. At the CHW/HHW entrance of the building in the mechanical room 2. AHU coil banks - inlets and outlets 3. As indicated on Drawings



SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 230993 - 1

SECTION 230993 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment. Refer to the controls portion of this Specification and the Drawings for a complete understanding of the control sequences. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating Division 230923 and service representatives of the equipment manufacturers to implement these control sequences along with Division 26. Prior to providing submittals, all field wiring connections shall be determined and shown on the submittals for electrical and controls interface.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 230923 "Building Digital Control System" for control equipment and devices and

for submittal requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

B. VAV: Variable air volume.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

A. Graphical User Interface (GUI) 1. All timers, time remaining on timers, set points or operation ranges shall be visible and

adjustable through the GUI. 2. A status LED shall be shown on the graphic next to each piece of equipment to show if

the device is in hand (local control) the LED shall be blue, forced through the Graphics page in hand the LED shall be yellow, in alarm the LED shall be red, if the equipment is in auto and off the LED shall be black, if the equipment is in auto and operating the LED shall be green.

B. Building Chilled Water Interface: 1. The Direct Digital Control system (DDC) shall monitor, trend and sequence the chilled

water service to the building as follows:



a. Schedule On/Off: A call for cooling from any chilled water valve shall initiate a call for chilled water. The chilled water coil control valve shall be commanded to the full open position.

b. The chilled water dp setpoint (at each AHU) shall have a starting setpoint of 15 PSID and reset through a range of 0.5 PSID to 20 PSID. If the most open CHW valve is open more than 85% the dp setpoint shall be reset up 0.1 PSID every minute until the most open valve is open 85% or less. If the most open CHW valve is open less than 80% the dp setpoint shall be reset down 0.1 PSID every minute until the CHW valve is open 80% or more. The GUI shall have a page dedicated to the CHW valves showing valves, their valve position, a GUI link of the device they serve, trends, and the ability to include or exclude the valve from the dp reset.

c. The control logic shall be slow-acting to avoid hunting. DDC Control system shall be configured to generate a Setpoint Reset History report.

C. Building Heating Hot Water Interface: 1. The Direct Digital Control system (DDC) shall monitor, trend and sequence the heating

hot water service to the building as follows: a. Schedule On/Off: A call for heating from any heating water valve shall

initiate a call for hot water. Either coil control valve shall be commanded to the full open position.

b. The heating hot water dp setpoint for DP-304 shall have a starting setpoint of 15 PSID and reset through a range of 0.5 PSID to 20 PSID. If the most open HHW valve is open more than 85% the dp setpoint shall be reset up 0.1 PSID every minute until the most open valve is open 85% or less. If the most open HHW valve is open less than 80% the dp setpoint shall be reset down 0.1 PSID every minute until the HHW valve is open 80% or more. The GUI shall have a page dedicated to the HHW valves showing valves, their valve position, a GUI link of the device they serve, trends, and the ability to include or exclude the valve from the dp reset.

c. If the differential pressure setpoint cannot be maintained by the for five minutes (adjustable), the control system shall stage on the building pump and modulate pump speed to maintain the differential pressure setpoint. The control logic shall be slow-acting to avoid hunting. The pump minimum speed shall be 10%.

d. DDC Control system shall be configured to generate a Setpoint Reset History report.

e. Metering: The control system shall monitor instantaneous natural gas therms, HHW BTUs and trend instantaneous BTUs and BTUH consumption using a BTU meter.

D. AHU-1 Sequence of Operation:

The Direct Digital Control system (DDC) shall schedule, turn on and off, monitor, trend, and sequence the airside system as follows: 1. LEED Pre-Occupancy Building Purge

a. Air handling system, ventilation system and VAV boxes shall be enabled.

b. VAV boxes shall modulate to maintain the maximum airflow setting. Hot water control valve and air handler chilled water valve shall be locked out.

c. Air handling unit minimum outside air, shall be commanded fully open. d. Air handling unit return air damper shall be commanded fully closed.



e. Purge duration and frequency shall be scheduled for initial building LEED flushout. Refer to Division 01 for purge schedule.

2. Post-Occupancy Title 24 Required 1-HR Building Purge a. Air handling system, ventilation system and VAV boxes shall be

enabled. b. VAV boxes shall modulate to maintain the minimum airflow setting. c. Air handling unit shall operate under demand control ventilation

setting. d. Purge duration shall be scheduled for 1-hour before the scheduled

occupied start hour and shall end at the scheduled occupied start hour.

3. Start/Stop a. When the air handler is OFF (stopped/disabled for any reason) the

following occurs: 1) The minimum outside air damper is commanded closed. 2) The return air damper is commanded open. 3) Supply fan is commanded to stop. 4) Return fan is commanded to stop. 5) All alarms are suppressed.

4. Enable/Disable a. The air handler is enabled based on a time of day programmable

schedule. b. The air handler shall start one hour before scheduled programmed

occupancy and operate in accordance with paragraph 1.4.D.2 Post-Occupancy Title 24 Required 1-HR Building Purge.

c. The following schedule shall be programmed:

Day Start Stop

Monday 7:00 AM 10:00 PM

Tuesday 7:00 AM 10:00 PM

Wednesday 7:00 AM 10:00 PM

Thursday 7:00 AM 10:00 PM

Friday 7:00 AM 10:00 PM

Saturday 7:00 AM 10:00 PM

Sunday Off Off

Holidays Off Off

5. Start-up

a. When the air handler is enabled automatically by the time of day schedule or manually by the operator the following occurs:

1) The minimum outside air damper is commended open. 2) The return air damper is commanded open. 3) The supply fan is commanded to start. 4) The supply fan speeds up to the programmed minimum speed 15 Hz

(adjustable) 5) Supply fan status is confirmed by the current switch. 6) Supply fan speed control loop is enabled. 7) Supply air temperature control loop is enabled. 8) Temperature and pressure alarms are enabled after 15 minutes (adjustable)

6. Outside Air / Return Air / Demand Controlled Ventilation (DCV) a. Minimum Outdoor Air Control: Modulate minimum outdoor air damper

to maintain minimum outside air setpoint when the supply air fan is proven on. Damper shall be closed otherwise.

b. Demand Controlled Ventilation (DCV) 1) The CO2 sensors must be located in the breathing zone (4 ft. above the

floor). CO2 sensors shall be certified by the manufacturer to have an accuracy of no less than 75 ppm, factory calibrated or calibrated at start-up,



and certified by the manufacturer to require calibration no more frequently than once every 5 years.

2) Outside air measuring station shall measure minimum outside air quantity and report its value to the DDC system. The outside air CO2 reading shall be assumed at 400 ppm. A differential of no more than 600 ppm shall be maintained during all occupied hours. Regardless of the CO2 sensor’s reading, the system is not required to provide more than the maximum ventilation rates given below. This high limit shall be implemented in the controls. The minimum outside air damper shall modulate to maintain the required ventilation rates.

3) The zone CO2 controls should increase the airflow rate at the space as described.

4) The minimum outdoor air setpoint shall be reset based on the highest zone CO2 loop signal from absolute minimum at 50% signal by modulating to design minimum at 100% signal to maintain the CO2 setpoint.

7. Return Air Damper: a. The return air damper shall be fully open when the unit is not in

economizer unless the minimum OSA damper is open more than 95% (adjustable). The return damper shall modulate to maintain the minimum OSA damper between 90% to 95% open (adjustable).

8. Supply Duct Static Pressure Control and Reset: a. The air handler shall have a supply air duct static pressure in the main b. The control logic shall be slow-acting to avoid hunting. Supply fan

speed shall modulate to maintain the pressure sensors at minimum setpoint. The supply fan speed minimum shall be 10% for motor cooling.

c. The starting static pressure setpoint shall be 0.75” W.C. (adjustable) the setpoint shall be reset through a range of 0.1” W.C. to MaxP setpoint. If the most open VAV box is open more than 85% the dp setpoint shall be reset up 0.05” W.C. per minute until the VAV zoneis open less than 85%. If the most open VAV box is open less than 80% the dp setpoint shall be reset down 0.05” W.C. per minute until the most open VAV zone is open at or above 80%.

d. MaxP shall be determined by the air balancer in conjunction with the control contractor as required to provide design airflow in all zones downstream of the duct static pressure sensor.

e. The GUI shall have a page dedicated to the VAV zones per AHU showing VAV zone damper position, a GUI link of the space they serve, trends, and the ability to include or exclude the zone from the dp reset.

9. Supply Air Temperature Control a. AHU Chilled Water Coil:

1) A “trim and respond” control algorithm shall maintain the actual average supply temperature to the corresponding setpoint. The chilled water valve shall modulate to maintain desired temperature setpoint when in cooling mode.

2) The supply air temperature shall be reset using the following reset schedule:

Supply Air Setpoint, °F OSA Temp, °F

58 55 57 60 56 65 55 70

3) If AHU supply fan is off, the corresponding AHU chilled water

valve shall be closed.



10. Failure a. If the supply fan is commanded ON and a positive status is not

received from the current switch after 30 seconds (adjustable), the start-up is aborted.

b. If the supply air fan is running and positive status is lost, the air handler is disabled.

c. If the supply duct pressure increases beyond 4” W.C. (adjustable) the high static pressure switch installed in the supply duct will cause the supply to stop. The switch requires a manual reset to allow the fans to restart.

d. If the return duct pressure decreases beyond -2” W.C. (adjustable) the low static pressure switch installed in the return duct will cause the supply and return fan to stop. The switch requires a manual reset to allow the fans to start.

11. Alarms a. Critical alarms are generated when:

1) The high duct static pressure switch is triggered. 2) The low duct static pressure switch is triggered. 3) If the supply air fan is commanded ON and positive status is not received

from the current switch after 30 seconds (adjustable). 4) If the return air fan is commanded ON and positive status is not received

from the current switch after 30 seconds (adjustable). 5) Minimum outside air damper is commanded fully open and positive status is

not received from the open end switch after 30 seconds (adjustable). 6) Minimum outside air damper is commanded fully closed and positive status

is not received from the open end switch after 30 seconds (adjustable). 7) Supply air temperature rises above 60°F (adjustable) for 5 minutes

(adjustable). b. Maintenance alarms are generated at the operator workstation when:

1) The pre-filter pressure drop reaches 0.5” W.C. (adjustable). a) The alarm shall vary with fan speed roughly as follows:

DPx = DP100(x)1.4

Where DP100 is the high limit pressure drop (0.8” WC) at design cfm and DPx is the high limit at speed (IGV) signal x (expressed as a fraction of full signal). For instance, the setpoint at 50% of full speed would be (0.5)1.4 or 38% of the design high limit pressure drop

2) The filter pressure drop reaches 0.8” W.C. (adjustable). a) The alarm shall very with fan speed roughly as follows:

DPx = DP100(x)1.4

Where DP100 is the high limit pressure drop (0.8” WC) at design cfm and DPx is the high limit at speed (IGV) signal x (expressed as a fraction of full signal). For instance, the setpoint at 50% of full speed would be (0.5)1.4 or 38% of the design high limit pressure drop

3) Difference between supply air volume and return air volume is higher than 2,500 CFM (adjustable) for 5 minutes (adjustable).

4) Difference between supply air volume and return air volume is lower than 2,000 CFM (adjustable) for 5 minutes (adjustable).

5) Supply air temperature drops below 50°F (adjustable) for 5 minutes (adjustable).

6) Alarm state is received from supply fan controller.



7) The outside air varies from the setpoint by 10% (adjustable) for more than 10 minutes (adjustable).

8) The CO2 for any space varies from the setpoint by 10% (adjustable) for more than 15 minutes (adjustable) Note: All delays must be verified and tweaked by the BAS contractor based on actual motor drives and actuators response time.

E. HP-1 Sequence of Operation:

The Direct Digital Control system (DDC) shall schedule, turn on and off, monitor, trend, and sequence the airside system as follows: 1. Start/Stop

a. When the unit is OFF (stopped/disabled for any reason) the following occurs:

1) The minimum outside air damper is commanded closed. 2) The economizer damper is commanded closed. 3) Supply fan is commanded to stop. 4) All alarms are suppressed.

2. Enable/Disable a. The unit is enabled based on a time of day programmable schedule. b. The unit shall start one hour before scheduled programmed

occupancy and operate in accordance with paragraph 1.4.E.2 Post-Occupancy Title 24 Required 1-HR Building Purge.


Day Start Stop







Sunday Off Off

Holidays Off Off

3. Supply Air Temperature Control

a. Supply air temperature: 1) The supply air temperature shall be reset using the following reset

schedule. Sequence shall allow for Owner to identify and define “rogue” zones to be excluded from the reset control

Supply Air Setpoint, °F OSA Temp, °F

58 55 57 60 56 65 55 70

4. Failure

a. If the supply fan is commanded ON and a positive status is not received from the current switch after 30 seconds (adjustable), the start-up is aborted.

b. If the supply air fan is running and positive status is lost, the is disabled.

5. Alarms a. Critical alarms are generated at the operator workstation when:

1) Minimum outside air damper is commanded fully open and positive status is not received from the open end switch after 30 seconds (adjustable).



2) Minimum outside air damper is commanded fully closed and positive status is not received from the open end switch after 30 seconds (adjustable).

3) Economizer air damper is commanded fully open and positive status is not received from the open end switch after 30 seconds (adjustable).

4) Economizer damper is commanded fully closed and positive status is not received from the open end switch after 30 seconds (adjustable).

5) Supply air temperature rises above 60°F (adjustable) for 5 minutes (adjustable).

F. Chiller CH-1 Sequence of Operation:

The Direct Digital Control system (DDC) shall schedule, turn on and off, monitor and trend as follows:

1. Start/Stop a. When the unit is OFF (stopped/disabled for any reason) the following

occurs: b. Unit starts upon call for cooling by any coil chilled water valve in open

position 1) All alarms are suppressed.

2. Enable/Disable a. The following schedule shall be programmed:

Day Start Stop







Sunday Off Off

Holidays Off Off

3. Failure

a. If the chiller is commanded ON and a positive status is not received from the current switch after 30 seconds (adjustable), the start-up is aborted.

b. If the chiller is running and positive status is lost, the is disabled.

G. Boiler Sequence of Operation:

The Direct Digital Control system (DDC) shall schedule, turn on and off, monitor, trend, and sequence the airside system as follows: 4. Start/Stop

1) All alarms are suppressed. 2) Boiler starts upon call for heating by any HW coil in open position.

5. Enable/Disable a. The unit is enabled based on a time of day programmable schedule. b. The unit shall start one hour before scheduled programmed occupancy and

operate in accordance with paragraph 1.4.E.2 Post-Occupancy Title 24 Required 1-HR Building Purge.


Day Start Stop









Sunday Off Off

Holidays Off Off

6. Supply water Temperature Control

a. AHU Hot Water Coil: 1) The supply water temperature shall be reset using the following reset

schedule. Sequence shall allow for Owner to identify and define “rogue” zones to be excluded from the reset control.

Supply water Setpoint, °F OSA Temp, °F

160 55 145 60 130 65 120 70

2) If boiler is off, the corresponding AHU hot water valve shall be closed.

7. Failure a. If the boiler is commanded ON and a positive status is not received from the

current switch after 30 seconds (adjustable), the start-up is aborted. b. If the boiler is running and positive status is lost, the is disabled.


H. Hot Water pump Sequence of Operation:

The Direct Digital Control system (DDC) shall schedule, turn on and off, monitor, and sequence the hot water system as follows: 9. Start/Stop

1) All alarms are suppressed. 2) pump starts upon call for heating by any HW coil in open position. 3) HW pumps start in Leed/ Lag configuration

10. Enable/Disable a. The pump is enabled based on a time of day programmable schedule. b. The unit shall start one hour before scheduled programmed occupancy and

operate in accordance with paragraph 1.4.E.2 Post-Occupancy Title 24 Required 1-HR Building Purge.


Day Start Stop







Sunday Off Off

Holidays Off Off

11. Supply water Temperature Control

a. AHU Hot Water Coil:



1) The supply water temperature shall be reset using the following reset schedule. Sequence shall allow for Owner to identify and define “rogue” zones to be excluded from the reset control.

Supply water Setpoint, °F OSA Temp, °F

160 55 145 60 130 65 120 70

2) If boiler is off, the corresponding AHU hot water valve shall be closed.

12. Failure a. If the boiler is commanded ON and a positive status is not received from the

current switch after 30 seconds (adjustable), the start-up is aborted. b. If the boiler is running and positive status is lost, the is disabled.


1)

3.2 BUILDING REPORTS

A. Provide year-around scheduling incorporating school holidays and vacations as provided by the Owner.

B. Annunciation of events and occurrences on three levels: routine maintenance, low-level alarm condition; high-level alarm condition.

1. Maintenance alarms shall annunciate conditions that require routine maintenance, such as dirty filters, or hours of equipment operation reaching elapsed time for scheduled preventive maintenance.

2. Low-level alarm shall annunciate conditions which reflect inoperability of equipment that would not prevent the HVAC systems from providing service but requires maintenance or repair to re-establish operation such as a failed pump or filter alarm.

3. High-level alarms shall annunciate conditions which require immediate response in order to insure provision of building HVAC, or that reflect a catastrophic failure of equipment.

4. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval designation of all conditions for annunciation. All equipment shall be monitored for elapsed time between inspection and service; all status of inoperability shall be monitored; all alarm conditions as indicted in this Section shall be monitored by the DDC system. All conditions as indicated herein shall annunciate via overriding screen display; display and output shall be submitted for review and approval.

3.3



SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 23 0993-1

SECTION 230993 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The sequences of operations have been copied and modified from ASHRAE Guideline 36P wherever possible.

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment. Refer to the controls portion of this Specification and the Drawings for a complete understanding of the control sequences. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating Division 230900 and service representatives of the equipment manufacturers to implement these control sequences along with Division 26. Prior to providing submittals, all field wiring connections shall be determined and shown on the submittals for electrical and controls interface.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 230923 "DDC Systems for HVAC" for control equipment.

C. DEFINITIONS 1. AHU: Air handling unit. 2. CV: Control valve. 3. CW: Condenser water. 4. DCV: Demand Control Ventilation. 5. DP: Differential pressure sensor. 6. EMS: Energy management system. 7. HHW: Heating hot water. 8. PI: Proportional plus integral 9. PSID: Pounds per square inch differential.

1.3 OBJECTIVES

A. Provide required air change rates, airflow offsets, heating, and cooling to satisfy the loads

B. Optimize energy performance through the use of trim and respond demand based response logic to reset supply air temperature, supply air pressure, and exhaust air pressure points.

C. Achieve stable operation under which ventilation rates, space temperature set-points, and space pressurization relationships are not compromised.



PART 2 - SCOPE

2.1 SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS

A. This guideline provides detailed sequences of operation for VAV multi-zone HVAC systems. Lists of hard-wired points and sample control diagrams are included.

PART 3 - DESIGN & FIELD DETERMINED SETPOINTS

3.1 INFORMATION PROVIDED BY DESIGNER

A. General Thermal Zone Information 1. Zone Temperature Setpoints

a. Default set points shall be based on zone type:

Zone Type Occupied Unoccupied

Heating Cooling Heating Cooling

VAV 70°F 75°F 60°F 90°F

0. CO2 Setpoints . Maximum CO2 setpoint for all zones with demand control ventilation (DCV) shall be

1,000 ppm. Co2 sensors shown on plans indicate which zones shall have DCV.

D.B. Multiple Zone VAV Air Handler Design Information 2. Temperature Setpoints

a. Min_SAT, lowest cooling supply air temperature setpoint. This shall be set to 52°F for all units.

b. Des_SAT, design supply air temperature setpoint. This shall be set to 52°F for all units

c. Max_SAT, highest cooling supply air temperature setpoint. This shall be set to 65°F for all units.

d. OAT_Min, the lower value of the OAT reset range. This shall be set to 60°F for all units.

e. OAT_Max, the higher value of the OAT reset range. This shall be set to 70°F for all units.

3. Ventilation Setpoints a. AbsMinOA, the design outdoor air rate when all zones with CO2 sensors or

occupancy sensors are unpopulated. Refer to “DCV MIN OA” column on AHU schedule on M002 for all AHUs.

b.a. DesMinOA, the design minimum outdoor airflow with areas served by the system are occupied at their design population, including diversity where applicable. Refer to “CODE MIN OA” column on AHU schedule on M002 for all AHUs.

3.2 INFORMATION PROVIDED BY (OR IN CONJUNCTION WITH) THE TEST & BALANCE CONTRACTOR

A. Multiple Zone Air Handler Design Information 1. Duct design maximum static pressure, Max_DSP 2. Minimum Fan Speed

a. Minimum speed setpoints for all VFD-driven equipment shall be determined in accordance with the test and balance specifications for the following as applicable: 1) Supply Fan



3. Ventilation plenum pressures

a. AbsMinDP, the absolute minimum outdoor air damper differential pressure that provides an outdoor airflow equal to the absolute minimum outdoor airflow, AbsMinOA.

b.a. DesMinDP, the design minimum outdoor air damper differential pressure that provides the design minimum outdoor airflow, DesMinOA.

PART 4 - SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS

A. General 1. Prior to implementing the sequence of operation, the Controls Contractor shall be fully

responsible to coordinate a meeting with the programmer, College maintenance staff and the Engineer of Record to insure that the functional blocks, control hardware and accessories are programmed correctly and virtually tested.

2. These sequences are intended to be performance based. Implementations that provide the same functional result using different underlying detailed logic will be acceptable.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, control loops shall be enabled and disabled based on the status of the system being controlled to prevent windup.

4. When a control loop is enabled or re-enabled, it and all its constituents (such as the proportional and integral terms) shall be set initially to a Neutral value.

5. A control loop in Neutral shall correspond to a condition that applies the minimum control effect, i.e. valves/dampers closed, VFDs at minimum speed, etc.

6. When there are multiple outdoor air temperature sensors, the system shall use the valid sensor that most accurately represents the outdoor air conditions at the equipment being controlled. a. Outdoor air temperature sensors at air handler outdoor air intakes shall be

considered valid only when the supply fan is proven on and unit is in Occupied Mode.

b. The outdoor air temperature used for optimum start, plant lockout, and other global sequences shall be the average of all valid sensor readings. If there are four or more valid outdoor air temperature sensors, discard the highest and lowest temperature readings.

7. The term “proven” (i.e. “proven on”/ “proven off”) shall mean that the equipment’s DI status point (where provided, e.g. current switch, DP switch, or VFD status) matches the state set by the equipment’s DO command point.

8. The term “software point” shall mean an analog variable, and “software switch” shall mean a digital (binary) variable, that are not associated with real I/O points. They shall be read/write capable (e.g. BACnet analog variable and binary variable).

9. The term “control loop” or “loop” is used generically for all control loops. These will typically be PID loops, but proportional plus integral plus derivative gains are not required on all loops. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the following guidelines shall be followed:

a. Use proportional only (P-only) loops for limiting loops. a. (such as zone CO2 control loops, etc.). b. Do not use the derivative term on any loops unless field tuning is not possible

without it.

Formatted: Space Before: 12 pt

Formatted: Space Before: 12 pt



10. To avoid abrupt changes in equipment operation, the output of every control loop shall be capable of being limited by a user adjustable maximum rate of change, with a default of 25% per minute.

11. All setpoints, timers, deadbands, PID gains, etc. listed in sequences shall be adjustable by the user with appropriate access level whether indicated as adjustable in sequences or not. Software points shall be used for these variables. Fixed scalar numbers shall not be embedded in programs except for physical constants and conversion factors.

12. Values for all points, including real (hardware) points used in control sequences shall be capable of being overridden by the user with appropriate access level (e.g. for testing and commissioning). If hardware design prevents this for hardware points, they shall be equated to a software point and the software point shall be used in all sequences.

13. Alarms a. There shall be 5 levels of alarm

1) Level 1: Critical/life safety 2) Level 2: Significant equipment failure 3) Level 3: Non-critical equipment failure/operation 4) Level 4: Energy conservation monitor 5) Level 5: Maintenance indication, notification

b. All alarms shall include a Time/Date Stamp using the standalone control module time and date.

c. Each alarm can be configured in terms of criticality (Critical/Not Critical), operator acknowledgement (Requires Acknowledgement / Does Not Require Acknowledgement), and conditions required for an alarm to clear automatically (Requires Acknowledgement of a Return to Normal / Does Not Require Acknowledgement of a Return to Normal).

d. An operator shall be able to sort alarms based on level, time/date, and current status.

e. Alarms should be reported with the following information: 1) Date and time of the alarm 2) Level of the alarm 3) Description of the alarm 4) Equipment tags for the units in alarm 5) Possible causes of the alarm, if provided by the fault detection routines 6) The Source per that serves the equipment in alarm

14. VFD Speed Points a. The speed analog output sent to VFDs shall be configured such that 0% speed

corresponds to 0 Hz and 100% speed corresponds to maximum speed configured in the VFD.

b. For each piece of equipment, the minimum speed shall be stored in a single software point. This value shall be written to the VFD’s minimum speed setpoint via the drive’s network interface; in the case of a hard-wired VFD interface, the minimum speed shall be the lowest speed command sent to the drive by the BAS. See PART 1 - 3.2A.2PART 1 - 3.2 A.2 for minimum speed setpoints.

15. Trim & Respond (T&R) Setpoint Reset Logic a. Trim & Respond setpoint reset logic and zone/system reset Requests where

referenced in sequences shall be implemented as described below. b. A “Request” is a call to reset a static pressure or temperature setpoint, generated

by downstream zones or air handling systems. These Requests are sent upstream to the plant or system that serves the zone or air handler that generated the Request.

1) For each downstream zone or system, and for each type of setpoint reset Request listed for the zone/system, provide the following software points:



Importance Multiplier is used to scale the number of requests the zone/system is generating. A value of zero causes the requests from that zone or system to be ignored. A value greater than one can be used to effectively increase the number of requests from the zone/system based on the critical nature of the spaces served.

a) Importance Multiplier (default = 1)

Request-Hours accumulates the integral of requests (prior to adjustment of Importance Multiplier) to help identify zones/systems that are driving the reset logic. Rogue zone identification is particularly critical in this context, since a single rogue zone can keep the Trim & Response loop at maximum, and prevent it from saving any energy.

b) Request-Hours. Provided SystemOK is true, every x minutes (default 5 minutes), add x/60 times the current number of Requests to this request-hours accumulator point. The request-hours point is reset to zero upon a global command from the system serving the zone– this global point simultaneously resets the request-hours point for all zones served by this system.

c) Cumulative%-Request-Hours. This is the zone Request Hours divided by the zone run-hours (the hours in any Mode other than Unoccupied Mode) since the last reset, expressed as a percentage.

d) A Level 4 alarm is generated if the zone Importance Multiplier is greater than zero, the zone/system Cumulative% Request Hours exceeds 70%, and the total number of zone run hours exceeds 40.

2) See zone and air handling system control sequences for logic to generate Requests.

3) Multiply the number of Requests determined from zone logic times the Importance Multiplier and send to the system that serves the zone. See system logic to see how Requests are used in Trim & Respond logic.

c. For each upstream system or plant setpoint being controlled by a T&R loop, define the following variables. Initial values are defined in system/plant sequences below. Values for trim, respond, time step, etc. shall be tuned to provide stable control.



Variable Definition

Device Associated device (e.g. fan, pump)

SP0 Initial setpoint

SPmin Minimum setpoint

SPmax Maximum setpoint

Td Delay timer

T Time step

I Number of Ignored Requests

R Number of Requests from zones/systems

SPtrim Trim amount

SPres Respond amount (must be opposite in sign to SPtrim)

SPres-max Maximum response per time interval (must be same sign as SPres)

Note that it is recommended that | SPres | > | SPtrim | so that the reset logic does not get stuck at a value, as can happen if SPres and SPtrim are equal in absolute value. The number of Ignored Request (I) should be set to zero for critical zones or air handlers.

d. Trim & Respond logic shall reset setpoint within the range SPmin to SPmax. When the associated device is off, the setpoint shall be SP0. The reset logic shall be active while the associated device is proven on, starting Td after initial device start command. When active, every time step T, trim the setpoint by SPtrim. If there are more than I Requests, respond by changing the setpoint by SP res * (R-I), (i.e. the number of Requests minus the number of Ignored Requests), but no more than SPres-max. In other words, every time step T:

Change setpoint by SPtrim If R>I, also change setpoint by (R-I)*SPres but no larger than SPres-max

16. Equipment Staging and Rotation a. The automatic even wear rotation presented in the following section is written using

the basis of equipment run time to determine position in the queue for staging and is triggered only during a stage up or stage down event. These sequences will provide the most even run time across multiple pieces of equipment. 1) Lead/lag: Unless otherwise noted, parallel staged devices (such as pumps,

towers) that are not redundant shall be lead/lag alternated when more than one is off or more than one is on so that the device with the most operating hours is made the later stage device and the one with the least number of hours is made the earlier stage device. For example, assuming there are three devices, if all three are off or all are on, the staging order will simply be based on run hours from lowest to highest. If two devices are on, the one with the most hours will be set to be stage 2 while the other is set to stage 1; this may be the reverse of the operating order when the devices were started. If two devices are off, the one with the most hours will be set to be stage 3 while the other is set to stage 2; this may be the reverse of the operating order when the devices were stopped.

2) Lead/standby: Unless otherwise noted, parallel devices (such as pumps, towers) that are 100% redundant shall be lead/standby alternated when more than one is off so that the device with the most operating hours is made



the later stage device and the one with the least number of hours is made the earlier stage device. For example, assuming there are three devices, if all three are off, the staging order will be based on run hours from lowest to highest. If devices run continuously, lead/standby shall switch at an operator-specified runtime; standby device shall first be started and proven on before former lead device is changed to standby and shut off.

b. Exceptions 1) Operators with appropriate access level shall be able to manually command

staging order via software points overriding the Even Wear or Periodic Rotation logic above, but not overriding the In Alarm or Hand Operation logic below.

2) In Alarm: If the lead device has a fault condition or has been manually switched off, a Level 2 alarm shall be generated and the device shall be set to the last stage position in the lead/lag order until alarm is reset by operator. Staging position of remaining devices shall follow the prevailing (Even Wear or Periodic Rotation) logic. A device in alarm can only automatically move up in the staging order if another device goes into alarm. Fault conditions include the following: a) Variable Speed Fans

(1) VFD critical fault is ON, or

(2) Status point not matching its on/off point for 3 seconds after a

time delay of 15 seconds while the device is commanded on, or

(3) Supervised HOA at control panel in OFF position, or

(4) Loss of power (e.g. VFD DC Bus voltage = zero)

3) Hand Operation: If a device is on in Hand (e.g. via an HOA switch or local control of VFD), the device shall be set to the lead device and a Level 4 alarm shall be generated. The device will remain as lead until the alarm is reset by the operator. Hand operation is determined by a) Variable Speed Fans

(1) Status point not matching its on/off point for 15 seconds while

the device is commanded off, or

(2) VFD in local “hand” mode, or

(3) Supervised HOA at control panel in ON position

17. Damper/Valve Position

a. Knowledge of damper and valve position are required for proper generation of Trim & Respond reset requests.

b. The following are acceptable methods for determining position: 1) Analog actuator. Position may be assumed to be equal to analog signal to

actuator. 2) Floating actuator. Provide either

a) Position feedback analog input b) Position estimated by timing pulse-open and pulse-closed commands

with auto-zeroing whenever zone is in Unoccupied Mode and damper is driven full closed. This option is not acceptable for 24/7 applications.

18. Hierarchical Alarm Suppression a. For each piece of equipment or space controlled by the BAS, define its relationship

(if any) to other equipment in terms of “source”, “load”, or “system”. 1) A component is a “source” if it provides resources to a downstream

component, such as a chiller providing chilled water to an AHU. 2) A component is a “load” if it receives resources from an upstream

component, such as an AHU that receives chilled water from a chiller.



3) The same component may be both a load (receiving resources from an upstream source) and a source (providing resources to a downstream load).

4) A set of components is a “system” if they share a load in common (i.e. collectively act as a source to downstream equipment, such as a set of chillers in a lead/lag relationship serving air handlers). a) If a single component acts as a source for downstream loads (e.g. an

AHU as a source for its dampers), then that single source component shall be defined as a “system” of one element.

b) For equipment with associated pumps (chillers, boilers, cooling towers): (1) If the pumps are in a one-to-one relationship with equipment they

serve, the pumps shall be treated as part of the system to which

they are associated (i.e. they are not considered loads) since a

pump failure will necessarily disable its associated equipment.

(2) If the pumps are headered to the equipment they serve, then the

pumps may be treated as a system, which is a load relative to the

upstream equipment (e.g. chillers) and a source relative to

downstream equipment (e.g. air handlers).

b. For each system as defined above, there shall be a SystemOK flag, which is either true or false.

c. SystemOK shall be true when all of the following are true: 1) The system is proven on. 2) The system is achieving its temperature and/or pressure setpoint(s) for at

least five minutes 3) The system is ready and able to serve its load

d. SystemOK shall be false while the system is starting up (i.e. before reaching setpoint) or when enough of the system’s components are unavailable (in alarm, disabled, or turned off) to disrupt the ability of the system to serve its load. This threshold shall be defined by the design engineer for each system. 1) By default, Level 1 through Level 3 component alarms (indicating equipment

failure) shall inhibit SystemOK. Level 4 and Level 5 component alarms (maintenance and energy efficiency alarms) shall not affect SystemOK.

2) The operator shall have the ability to individually determine which component alarms may or may not inhibit SystemOK.

e. The BAS shall selectively suppress (i.e. fail to announce; alarms may still be logged to a database) alarms for load components if SystemOK is false for the source system that serves that load. 1) If SystemOK is false for a cooling water system (i.e. chiller, cooling tower, or

associated pump) then only high temperature alarms from the loads shall be suppressed.

2) If SystemOK is false for a heating water system (i.e. boiler or associated pump) then only low temperature alarms from the loads shall be suppressed.

3) If SystemOK is false for an airside system (air handler, fan coil, VAV, etc.) then all alarms from the loads shall be suppressed.

f. This hierarchical suppression shall cascade through multiple levels of load-source relationship, such that alarms at downstream loads shall also be suppressed.

g. The following types of alarms will never be suppressed by this logic:

1) Life/safety and Level 1 alarms 2) Failure-to-start alarms (i.e. equipment is commanded on, but status point

shows equipment to be off) 3) Failure-to-stop/hand alarms (i.e. equipment is commanded off, but status

point shows equipment to be on)



19. Time-Based Suppression Block a. This block shall calculate a time delay period after any change in setpoint based on

the difference between the controlled variable (e.g. zone temperature) at the time of the change and the new setpoint. The default time delay period shall be: 1) For thermal zone temperature alarms: 10 minutes per °F of difference, but

no longer than 120 minutes

For example if setpoint changes from 68°F to 70°F and the zone temperature is 68.5°F at the time of the change, inhibit alarm for 15 minutes (1.5°F * 10 minutes/°F ) after the change.

2) For thermal zone temperature cooling requests: 5 minutes per °F of difference, but no longer than 30 minutes

3) For thermal zone temperature heating requests: 5 minutes per °F of difference, but no longer than 30 minutes

B. Generic Thermal Zones 1. This section applies to all single zone systems and sub-zones of air handling systems. 2. Setpoints

a. Each zone shall have separate occupied and unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints.

b. The active setpoints shall be determined by the Operating Mode of the Zone Group [see See Error! Reference source not found.PART 1-1 - 3.2C.6]. 1) The setpoints shall be the occupied setpoints during Occupied Mode, Warm

up Mode, and Cool-down Mode. 2) The setpoints shall be the unoccupied setpoints during Unoccupied Mode,

Setback Mode, and Setup Mode. c. The software shall prevent

1) The heating setpoint from exceeding the cooling setpoint minus 1°F (i.e. the minimum difference between heating and cooling setpoints shall be 1°F)

2) The unoccupied heating setpoint from exceeding the occupied heating setpoint; and

3) The unoccupied cooling setpoint from being less than the occupied cooling setpoint.

d. Where the zone has a local setpoint adjustment knob/button 1) The setpoint adjustment offsets established by the occupant shall be

software points that are persistent (e.g. not reset daily), but the actual offset used in control logic shall be adjusted based on limits and modes as describe below.

2) The adjustment shall be capable of being limited in software. a) As a default, the active occupied cooling setpoint shall be limited

between 72°F and 80°F. b) As a default, the active occupied heating setpoint shall be limited

between 65°F and 72°F. 3) The active heating and cooling setpoints shall be independently adjustable,

respecting the limits and anti-overlap logic described above. If zone thermostat provides only a single setpoint adjustment, then the adjustment shall move both the active heating and cooling setpoints upwards or downwards by the same amount, within the limits described above.

4) The adjustment shall only affect occupied setpoints in Occupied Mode, and shall have no impact on setpoints in all other modes.

5) At the onset of demand limiting, the local setpoint adjustment value shall be frozen. Further adjustment of the setpoint by local controls shall be suspended for the duration of the demand limit event.

e. Cooling Demand Limit Setpoint Adjustment: The active cooling setpoints for all zones shall be increased when a demand limit is imposed on the associated Zone Group. The operator shall have the ability to exempt individual zones from this



adjustment through the normal BAS user interface. Changes due to demand limits are not cumulative. 1) At Demand Limit Level 1, increase setpoint by 1°F. 2) At Demand Limit Level 2, increase setpoint by 2°F. 3) At Demand Limit Level 3, increase setpoint by 4°F.

f. Heating Demand Limit Setpoint Adjustment: The active heating setpoints for all zones shall be decreased when a demand limit is imposed on the associated Zone Group. The operator shall have the ability to exempt individual zones from this adjustment through the normal BAS user interface. Changes due to demand limits are not cumulative. 1) At Demand Limit Level 1, decrease setpoint by 1°F. 2) At Demand Limit Level 2, decrease setpoint by 2°F. 3) At Demand Limit Level 3, decrease setpoint by 4°F.

g. Hierarchy of Setpoint Adjustments: The following adjustment restrictions shall prevail in order from highest to lowest priority: 1) Setpoint overlap restriction (PART 1 - 3.2B.2.c.1) 2) Absolute limits on local setpoint adjustment (PART 1 - 3.2B.2.d.1) 3) Demand limit

a) Occupancy sensors: Change of setpoint by occupancy sensor is added to change of setpoint by any demand limits in effect.

b) Local setpoint adjustment: Any changes to setpoint by local adjustment are frozen at the onset of the demand limiting event and remain fixed for the duration of the event. Additional local adjustments are ignored for the duration of the demand limiting event.

4) Scheduled setpoints based on Zone Group mode 3. Local override: When thermostat override buttons are depressed, the call for Occupied

Mode operation shall be sent up to the Zone Group control for 60 minutes. 4. Control Loops

a. Two separate control loops shall operate to maintain space temperature at setpoint, the Cooling Loop and the Heating Loop. 1) The Heating Loop shall be enabled whenever the space temperature is

below the current zone heating setpoint temperature, and disabled when space temperature is above the current zone heating setpoint temperature and the Loop output is zero for 30 seconds. The Loop may remain active at all times if provisions are made to minimize integral windup.

2) The Cooling Loop shall be enabled whenever the space temperature is above the current zone cooling setpoint temperature, and disabled when space temperature is below the current zone cooling setpoint temperature and the Loop output is zero for 30 seconds. The Loop may remain active at all times if provisions are made to minimize integral windup.

b. The Cooling Loop shall maintain the space temperature at the active cooling setpoint. The output of the loop shall be a software point ranging from 0% (no cooling) to 100% (full cooling).

c. The Heating Loop shall maintain the space temperature at the active heating setpoint. The output of the loop shall be a software point ranging from 0% (no heating) to 100% (full heating).

d. Loops shall use proportional + integral logic or other technology with similar performance. Proportional-only control is not acceptable, although the integral gain shall be small relative to the proportional gain. P and I gains shall be adjustable by the operator.

e. See other sections for how the outputs from these loops are used. 5. Zone State

a. Heating: when the output of the space heating control loop is nonzero and the output of the cooling loop is equal to zero.

b. Cooling: when the output of the space cooling control loop is nonzero and the output of the heating loop is equal to zero.



c. Deadband: when not in either Heating or Cooling. 6. Zone Alarms

a. Zone temperature alarms 1) High temperature alarm

a) If the zone is 3°F above cooling setpoint for 10 minutes, generate Level 3 alarm.

b) If the zone is 5°F above cooling setpoint for 10 minutes, generate Level 2 alarm.

2) Low temperature alarm a) If the zone is 3°F below heating setpoint for 10 minutes, generate

Level 3 alarm. b) If the zone is 5°F below heating setpoint for 10 minutes, generate

Level 2 alarm. 3) Suppress zone temperature alarms as follows:

a) After zone setpoint is changed per PART 1 - 3.2A.19PART 1 - 3.2A.21. b) While Zone Group is in Warmup or Cool-down Modes. c) For zones with an Importance multiplier [see PART 1 - 3.2A.15.b.1)] of

zero for its static pressure reset, SAT reset, or Hot Water reset Trim & Respond loops.

b. For zones with CO2 sensors:

1) CO2 sensors: If the CO2 concentration is less than 300 ppm, or the zone is in Unoccupied Mode for more than 2 hours and zone CO2 concentration exceeds 600 ppm, generate a Level 3 alarm. The alarm text shall identify the sensor and indicate that it may be out of calibration.

2) If the CO2 concentration exceeds setpoint plus 10% for more than 10 minutes generate a Level 3 alarm.

C. Multiple Zone VAV Air Handling Unit 1. Supply Fan Control

a. Supply Fan Start/Stop 1) Supply fan shall run when system is in the Cool-down Mode, Setup Mode, or

Occupied Mode. 2) If there are any VAV-reheat boxes on perimeter zones, supply fan shall also

run when system is in Setback Mode or Warmup Mode (i.e. all Modes except Unoccupied).

3) Totalize current airflow rate from VAV boxes to a software point, Vps. b. Static Pressure Setpoint Reset

The trim & respond reset parameters below are a suggested as a starting place; they will most likely require adjustment during the commissioning/tuning phase.

1) Static pressure setpoint: Setpoint shall be reset using Trim & Respond logic [see PART 1 - 3.2A.15] using the following parameters:

Variable Value

Device Supply Fan

SP0 0.5 inches

SPmin 0.1 inches

SPmax Max_DSP (See PART 1 -

3.2A.1)

Td 10 minutes

T 2 minutes

I 2



Variable Value

R Zone Static Pressure Reset Requests

SPtrim -0.05 inches

SPres +0.06 inches

SPres-max +0.13 inches

c. Static Pressure Control 1) Supply fan speed is controlled to maintain duct static pressure at setpoint

when the fan is proven on. Where the Zone Groups served by the system are small, provide multiple sets of gains that are used in the control loop as a function of a load indicator (such as supply fan airflow rate, the area of the Zone Groups that are occupied, etc.).

2. Supply Air Temperature Control a. Control loop is enabled when the supply air fan is proven on, and disabled and

output set to Deadband (no heating) otherwise. b. Supply Air Temperature Setpoint

1) See PART 1 - 3.12PART 1 - 3.15) for Min_SAT, Des_SAT, Max_SAT, OAT_Min, and OAT_Max setpoints.

2) During Occupied Mode: Setpoint shall be reset from Min_SAT when the outdoor air temperature is OAT_Max and above, proportionally up to T-max when the outdoor air temperature is OAT_Min and below.

The trim & respond reset parameters below are a suggested as a starting place; they will most likely require adjustment during the commissioning/tuning phase.

a) T-max shall be reset using Trim & Respond logic [see PART 1 - 3.2A.15] between Des_SAT and Max_SAT. The following parameters are suggested as a starting place, but they will require adjustment during the commissioning/tuning phase:

Variable Value

Device AHU Supply Fan

SP0 SPmax

SPmin Des_SAT

SPmax Max_SAT

Td 10 minutes

T 2 minutes

I 2

R Zone Cooling SAT Requests

SPtrim +0.2ºF

SPres -0.3ºF

SPres-max -1.0ºF

The net result of this SAT reset strategy is depicted in the chart below for Min_SAT = 53°F, Des_SAT = 55°F, Max_SAT = 65°F, OAT_Max=70°F, and OAT_Min = 60°F:



:

3) During Setup or Cool-Down Modes: Setpoint shall be Min_SAT. 4) During Warmup and Setback Modes: Setpoint shall be 95°F.

Outdoor air and return air dampers are sequenced rather than complementary (as per traditional sequences) to reduce fan power at part loads.

c. Supply air temperature shall be controlled to setpoint using a control loop whose output is mapped to sequence outdoor air damper, return air damper, and chilled water valve as shown in the diagram below. 1) Economizer damper maximum (MaxOA-P) position is limited for economizer

high limit lockout [see Error! Reference source not found.PART 1 - 3.2E.5]. 2) MaxRA-P and MinOA-P are modulated to control minimum outdoor air

volume [see Error! Reference source not found.PART 1 - 3.2E.4]. 3) The points of transition along the x-axis shown and described below are

representative. Separate gains shall be provided for each section of the control map (economizer, chilled water), that are determined by the Contractor to provide stable control. Alternatively, Contractor shall adjust the precise value of the x-axis thresholds shown in the figure to provide stable control.

T-max with no

Requests

T-max with

many Requests

SA

T S

etp

oin

t

55°F

Outdoor Air Temperature 60°F 70°F

53°F

65°F



3. Minimum Outdoor Airflow Setpoints

a. Outdoor airflow setpoint, for California Title 24 ventilation: 1) See 3.1D.2 for setpoints AbsMinOA and DesMinOA:

Variable Name Description Default Value

TSF Temperature rise across supply fan 2° F

TMIN

Minimum difference between OAT and RAT to evaluate economizer error conditions (FC#6)

10° F

ƐSAT Temperature error threshold for SAT sensor 2° F

ƐRAT Temperature error threshold for RAT sensor 2° F

ƐMAT Temperature error threshold for MAT sensor 5° F

ƐOAT Temperature error threshold for OAT sensor

2° F if local sensor @

unit.

5° F if global sensor.

ƐF Airflow error threshold 30%

ƐVFDSPD VFD speed error threshold 5%

ƐDSP Duct static pressure error threshold 0.1”

ƐCCET Cooling coil entering temperature sensor error. Equal to ƐMAT or dedicated sensor error Varies, see

Description ƐCCLT

Cooling coil leaving temperature sensor error. Equal to ƐSAT or dedicated sensor error

OSMAX Maximum number of changes in Operating State

7

Return Air

Damper Position HW Valve

MinOA-P

MaxRA-P

Economizer

Outdoor Air

Damper Position

CHW Valve

Return Air

Damper

Position

100%

0%

Dam

per

/val

ve

Po

siti

on

, %

op

en

Supply Air Temperature Control Loop Signal

Formatted: Highlight



Variable Name Description Default Value

ModeDelay Time in minutes to suspend Fault Condition evaluation after a change in Mode

90

AlarmDelay Time in minutes to that a Fault Condition must persist before triggering an alarm

60

The purpose of ΔTMIN is to ensure that the mixing box/economizer damper tests are meaningful. These tests are based on the relationship between supply, return, and outdoor air. If RAT ≈ MAT, these tests will not be accurate and will produce false alarms.

G.D. Chilled Water System 1. General

a. All primary source of chilled water shall be provided by the central plant. b. BTU monitoring shall be available at the central plant connection to the building.

2. Lead-Lag pump operation

a. The chilled water pumps shall operate in lead-lag, switching the lead pump every week.

b. If the chilled water flow rate (as measured at BTU meter) is greater than 47% of design flow rate continuously for 10 minutes, the lag pump shall energize and modulate in parallel with lead pump to maintain operational dp set-point.

c. If both pumps are running and the flow rate is less than 47% of design flow rate continuously for 10 minutes, the lag pump shall de-energize and the lead pump shall resume normal operation.

3. Chilled water differential pressure operational set-point a. Differential pressure setpoint shall be reset using Trim & Respond logic (see

Paragraph PART 1 - 3.2A.15) with the following parameters. DP-MAX is the design DP setpoint determined in conjunction with the balancing contractor. Refer to specification section 230593.

Variable Value

Device Any CHW Pump

SP0 DP-MAX

SPmin 1 psi

SPmax DP-MAX

Td 15 minutes

T 5 minutes

I 2

R Cooling CHWDP Reset Requests

SPtrim -2%

SPres +3%

SPres-max +7%

4. Chilled water pump operation

a. If differential pressure is at or above operational set-point without the chilled water pumps running, they shall remain off.

b. If differential pressure drops below operational set-point, lead chilled water pump shall energize and modulate to maintain operational dp set-point.



c. If differential pressure rises above operational set-point for 10 minutes continuously, lead chilled water pump shall shut down.

5. Alarms

a. Static pressure is at least 5” above set-point continuously for 15 minutes. b. Static pressure is at least 5” below set-point continuously for 15 minutes.

H.E. Heating Hot Water System 1. General

a. All primary source of hot water shall be provided by the central plant via existing heat exchanger.

b. BTU monitoring shall be available on the building heating hot water loop near the heat exchanger..

2. Lead-Lag pump operation

a. The hot water pumps shall operate in lead-lag, switching the lead pump every week.

b. If the hot water flow rate (as measured at BTU meter) is greater than 47% of design flow rate continuously for 10 minutes, the lag pump shall energize and modulate in parallel with lead pump to maintain operational dp set-point.

c. If both pumps are running and the flow rate is less than 47% of design flow rate continuously for 10 minutes, the lag pump shall de-energize and the lead pump shall resume normal operation.

3. Hot water differential pressure operational set-point a. Differential pressure setpoint shall be reset using Trim & Respond logic (see

Paragraph PART 1 - 3.2A.15) with the following parameters. DP-MAX is the design DP setpoint determined in conjunction with the balancing contractor. Refer to specification section 230593.

Variable Value

Device Any HW Pump

SP0 DP-MAX

SPmin 1 psi

SPmax DP-MAX

Td 15 minutes

T 5 minutes

I 2

R Heating HWDP Reset Requests

SPtrim -2%

SPres +3%

SPres-max +7%

4. Hot water pump operation

a. Lead hot water pump shall modulate to maintain operational dp set-point. 5. Hot water temperature control

a. High temperature hot water control valve shall modulate to maintain hot water supply temperature downstream of existing heat exchanger (as measured by hot water supply temp sensor for BTU meter) at 180 deg F.

6. Alarms

a. Static pressure is at least 5 feet above set-point continuously for 15 minutes. b. Static pressure is at least 5 feet below set-point continuously for 15 minutes.

I.F. Building reports 1. Provide year-around scheduling incorporating school holidays and vacations as provided



by the Owner. 2. Annunciation of events and occurrences on three levels: routine maintenance, low-level

alarm condition; high-level alarm condition. a. Maintenance alarms shall annunciate conditions that require routine maintenance,

such as dirty filters, or hours of equipment operation reaching elapsed time for scheduled preventive maintenance.

b. Low-level alarm shall annunciate conditions which reflect inoperability of equipment that would not prevent the HVAC systems from providing service but requires maintenance or repair to re-establish operation such as a failed pump or filter alarm.

c. High-level alarms shall annunciate conditions which require immediate response in order to insure provision of building HVAC, or that reflect a catastrophic failure of equipment.

d. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval designation of all conditions for annunciation. All equipment shall be monitored for elapsed time between inspection and service; all status of inoperability shall be monitored; all alarm conditions as indicted in this Section shall be monitored by the DDC system. All conditions as indicated herein shall annunciate via overriding screen display; display and output shall be submitted for review and approval.

J.G. History and Trending. 1. All control points shall be recorded in intervals no shorter than 15 minutes. These

recordings shall be exportable to a CSV file using a user selected time window. 2. Where zone data (such as damper or valve position, control loop signal) is used for reset

of the AHU system serving the zone, the zone tag (name) shall be recorded when it is the zone driving the reset (such as the zone requiring the most cooling). This data shall be available for reports so that the zones that are undersized or otherwise driving the system can be identified for remediation if required.

END OF SECTION 23 0993


HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 – 1

SECTION 232113 – HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specify pipe and fitting materials manufactured exclusively in the United States, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following: 1. Chilled-water piping. 2. Air-vent piping. 3. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping. 4. Hydronic specialties.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 232123 "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic

piping.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature: 1. Chilled Water Piping: 100 psig at 150 °F. 2. Heating Hot Water Piping: 100 psig at 200 °F. 3. Air-Vent Piping: 100 psig at 200 °F. 4. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to

which it is attached.




B. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. All piping data. Submit data indicating that pipe, tube and fittings are manufactured

exclusively in the United States. 2. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for

calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves. 3. Air control devices. 4. Hydronic specialties.



C. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Water-Treatment Chemicals: Furnish enough chemicals for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.


A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure-seal joint

manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings.

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Piping shall be manufactured exclusively in the United States and meet the following requirements: 1. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K and Type L as indicated in Part 3

"Piping Applications" Article. 2. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 3. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Piping shall be manufactured exclusively in the United States and meet the following requirements: 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, domestic black steel with plain ends; ERW, grade B, and wall

thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping

Applications" Article. 3. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping

Applications" Article. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of

the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Butt welding, fittings. c. Flanges: Raised face, slip-on or flat.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: 1. Conform to AWS A5.8. 2. Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." 3. Use 15% silver brazing filler metal without flux.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.



G. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: 1. Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating

material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Dielectric connections shall be cast brass union/coupling with 12 inch brass nipples.

2.5 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and High Performance Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Direct Digital Control System."

C. Plastic Ball Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Asahi/America. b. George Fischer Inc. c. Nibco, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Body: One-, two-, or three-piece CPVC or PVC to match piping. 3. Ball: Full-port CPVC or PVC to match piping. 4. Seats: PTFE. 5. Seals: EPDM. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. 7. Handle Style: Tee shape. 8. CWP Rating: Equal to piping service. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: Equal to piping service. 10. Not all manufacturers comply with the standard in subparagraph below. 11. Comply with MSS SP-122.

D. Plastic Butterfly Valves: 1. Available:

a. Asahi/America. b. George Fischer Inc. c. Nibco, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Body: PVC or CPVC to match piping wafer type for installation between flanges. 3. Disc: EPDM-coated steel. 4. Seats: PTFE. 5. Handle Style: Locking lever. 6. CWP Rating: Equal to piping service. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: Equal to piping service.









2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett a division of ITT Industries. 2. Amtrol, Inc. 3. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

B. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

C. Automatic Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

D. Bladder-Type Expansion Tanks: ET-1 1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum

operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain required expansion capacity.

3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats. 4. Retain one of three paragraphs and associated subparagraphs below to suit system

capacity.

E. Tangential-Type Air and Sediment Separators: AS-1 1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum working

pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature. 2. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into

expansion tank. 3. Solid separation efficiency of 98% of 200 mesh sand and water solution and be capable

of heavier than water undissolved sediment separation of at least 40 microns. 4. Designed, constructed and stamped fro 125 psi@350 degrees F in accordance with

Section VIII, division 1 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, and registered with the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors.

5. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: flanged connections. 6. Blowdown Connection: Threaded. 7. Size: Match system flow capacity.

2.7 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Keckley.



b. Metraflex. c. Mueller Steam Specialty.

2. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 3. End Connections:

a. Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller. b. Flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

4. Strainer Screen: 40 mesh startup strainer, 1/8” screen, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 40 percent or greater free area.

5. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective

jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment, maximum 6” long. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

C. Pump Suction and Discharge Connections: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Metraflex 2. Stainless hose, flexible braid, integral rotational vanes and flanged connection for pump

suction connection. 3. Stainless hose, flexible braid, integral straightening vanes and flanged connection for

pump discharge connection. 4. Install flexible connectors at all suction and discharge pump connections to relieve pump

and piping stresses. a. Flexible hose section to be 304 stainless steel, close pitch, annular corrugated

hose with a type 304 braided outer covering. b. End connections to be ANSI class 150 carbon steel plate flanges. c. Overall length to allow for a minimum of 6" intermittent flexing.

5. Connectors mounted at the suction side of pumps shall be located upstream of the inlet elbow, and incorporate specially designed stationary vanes that impart a rotational motion as the fluid enters the elbow. Vanes to be capable of counteracting elbow induced turbulence, enabling the fluid to negotiate the turn uniformly, and exit with a flat velocity profile.

6. Connectors at the discharge side of pumps shall incorporate internal flow straightening vanes to reduce turbulence prior to the balancing valve. Vanes to be capable of reducing discharge turbulence equal to 5-10 pipe diameters of straight pipe, while allowing full rated movement of the connector.

2.8 ROOF PIPING SUPPORTS:

A. Manufacturer: 1. PHP Model PSE-2-2 with RB-18 base, engineered for this project by the manufacturer.

B. Requirements: 1. The support shall be designed to support two pipes at any specified height or width. 2. The support shall be designed for installation without roof penetrations, flashing or

damage to roofing material. Provide isolation pads below all supports per manufacturers recommendations.

3. The supports shall be spaced according to mechanical drawings or as recommended by the manufacturer.

4. Base:



a. Size shall be 18” x 18” x 3”, 18” round b. Weight shall be 10-1/2 lbs c. Material shall be injection molded high density/high impact polypropylene with UV-

inhibitors and Antioxidants. d. Color shall be black e. Density shall be 55.8 lb/cu ft

5. Rod Type: a. Diameter shall be 5/8” b. Length shall be as required to maintain bottom of pipe at 1’-0” above finished floor c. Finish shall be hot dip galvanized

6. Hanger Type: a. Clevis b. Finish shall be hot dip galvanized carbon steel

7. Strut Type: a. 1-7/8” strut or larger b. Provide roll-formed 3-sided tubular shape, perforated with 9/16” holes at 1-7/8”

centers on three sides. c. Thickness shall be 12 gauge d. Carbon steel finish and hot dip galvanized per ASTM A 123 e. Hardware such as nuts, bolts and washers shall be hot dip galvanized.

2.9 COIL PIPING PACKAGE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. NuTech Company. 2. Flow Design Inc. 3. Griswold Controls.

B. Coil piping package – 1/2" to 2”: 1. Supply Side:

a. Combination Y-strainer with integral isolation ball valve and pressure/temperature port. 1) Forged or cast brass body. EPDM O-ring. Plated steel handle with vinyl

grip. Blow out-proof stem. Chrome plated ball with Teflon seats. 2) Strainer with 20 mesh stainless steel screen with removable cap. Strainer

shall be fitted with a hose end blow down valve with cap and chain. 3) Minimum rating of 600 PSIG at 250°F.

2. Return Side: a. Union with pressure/temperature port and manual air vent:

1) Brass O-ring type union. EPDM O-ring. Knurled handle and cap. Blowout-proof stem. Side vent with 1/8" hose barb. 1/4" and 1/2” NPT. Extended length.

2) Minimum Ratings 600 PSIG at 250°F. b. Isolation ball valve with integral pressure/temperature port:

1) Forged or cast brass body. EPDM O-ring. Plated steel handle with vinyl grip. Blow out-proof stem. Chrome plated ball with Teflon seats.

2) Minimum rating of 600 PSIG at 250°F. c. No manual or automatic balancing valves required on main pipe.

C. Coil piping package 2-1/2” to 12”: 1. Supply Side:

a. Flange end Y-strainer with high performance butterfly valve and pressure/temperature port:



1) Y-strainer shall have cast iron body. Fiber gasket. Stainless steel strainer screen. ANSI 125# Flanged. Strainer shall include pressure/temperature port and drain valve.

2) High performance butterfly valve shall be lug type with ductile iron body, designed to be installed at inlet of strainer. Resilient seat for bubble tight shut off. Blowout proof stem with pinned disc. Universal mounting flange conforms to ISO-5211. 2.5”-6” supplied with adjustable flow positioning plate. Sizes 8”- 12” provided with a gear operator.

3) Minimum rating of 175 PSIG at 250°F. 2. Return Side:

a. Flange end high performance butterfly valve: 1) High performance butterfly valve shall be lug type with ductile iron body,

designed to be installed between all types of ANSI 125/150 flanges. Resilient seat for bubble tight shut off. Blowout proof stem with pinned disc. Universal mounting flange conforms to ISO-5211. 2.5”-6” supplied with adjustable flow positioning plate. Sizes 8”- 12” provided with a gear operator.

2) Minimum rating of 175 PSIG at 250°F. b. Flange end pressure/temperature port and manual air vent:

1) Pressure/temperature and manual air vent port. 2) Minimum rating of 175 PSIG at 250°F.

3. Balancing Valves: a. For stacked cooling coils, provide Griswold Quickset or equal manual balancing

valve to each coil connection. b. No manual or automatic balancing valves required on single coils.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Process cooling-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange

fittings; and threaded joints. 3. Polypropylene

B. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 125, cast-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings;

and threaded joints.

C. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

D. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange

fittings; and threaded joints.

E. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:



1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

F. Air-Vent Piping: 1. Inlet: Same as service where installed. 2. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with brazed joints.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Paint all welds.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

M. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4" ball valve, and short NPS 3/4" threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

N. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.



O. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

P. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings to main pipe. Connect branch tee fittings to the bottom or side of the main pipe based on connection requirements. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. Saddle fittings are not acceptable.

Q. Install valves according to Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

R. Install unions in piping, NPS 2” and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

T. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.

U. Identify piping as specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Seismic restraints are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Provide spring hangers to support vertical runs for the first five hangers for all mechanical

piping mains connected to pumps. 3. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with

copper pipe. 4. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from

scratching pipe.



D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1 : Maximum span, 6 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

F. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points.

G. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Solder Filler Metals: Not used on this project.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: 1. Conform to AWS A5.8. 2. Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." 3. Use 15% silver brazing filler metal without flux.

E. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs

and restore full ID. 3. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

F. Welded Joints: 1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and

welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. 2. Paint all welds.



G. Flanged Joints: 1. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. 2. Install gasket concentrically positioned. 3. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due

to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Per 2010 California Mechanical Code, Chapter 12 Hydronics, 1201.2.8.3 Pressure Test:

a. Piping shall be tested with a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 psig, but at least fifty (50) psig greater than operating pressure.

b. This pressure shall be maintained for at least thirty (30) minutes. c. Required tests shall be conducted by the contractor in the presence of an

authorized inspector. d. The piping being tested shall remain exposed to the inspector and shall not leak

during the test. 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 30 minutes, examine piping,

joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

D. Perform the following before operating the system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.



6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.

E. Installation: 1. Pipe, Duct, Cable, and Conduit Support Systems:

a. Locate bases and support framing as indicated on drawings and as specified herein. Provide complete and adequate support of all piping, ducts, and conduit, whether or not all required devices are shown.

b. The use of wood for supporting piping is not permitted. c. Provide supports spaced so deflection of piping does not exceed 1/240 of span. d. Install framing at spacing indicated, but in no case at greater than 10 feet on

center. e. Accurately locate and align bases.

1) Consult manufacturer of existing or new roofing system as to the type of isolation pads required between the roof and base.

2) Set isolation pads in adhesive if required by manufacturer's instructions. 3) Place bases on isolation pads. 4) Adhere or mechanically attach if required by code. 5) Where applicable, replace gravel around bases.

f. Set framing posts into bases and assemble framing structure as indicated. g. Use galvanized fasteners for galvanized framing and stainless steel fasteners for

stainless steel framing.


A. When requested by the University Representative, provide a factory-trained representative of the manufacturer to visit the site while the work is in progress to assure that the installation conforms to the design requirements and the manufacturer's installation requirements.

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove all packaging, unused fasteners, and other installation materials from the project site.

B. Provide protection as required to leave the work in undamaged condition at the time of substantial completion.

3.10 PAINTING

A. Field Applied: 1. Paint all exposed mechanical piping, valves, supports, hangers and appurtenances.

Provide minimum 5 mils dry film thickness. Painting is not required on insulated chilled water piping with color coated PVC jacket.

2. Paint shall be a high performance polyurethane enamel coating system. Acceptable paint manufacturers include Ameron, Tnemec or engineer approved equal. Acceptable primer manufacturers include Ameron Amershield VOC, Tnemec's Series 1075 (1074) Endura-Shield, semi-gloss (gloss) sheen or equal. Provide minimum 5 mils dry film thickness.



HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 1

SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes special-duty valves and specialties for the following: 1. Chilled-water piping. 2. Makeup-water piping. 3. Condensate-drain piping. 4. Blowdown-drain piping. 5. Air-vent piping. 6. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for

calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves. 2. Air-control devices. 3. Hydronic specialties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve, include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.


A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and

stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated: 1. Chilled-Water Piping: <Insert psig (kPa)> at [200 deg F (93 deg C)] Makeup-Water

Piping: [80 psig (552 kPa)] <Insert value> at [150 deg F (66 deg C)] Condensate-Drain Piping: [150 deg F (66 deg C)].

2. Blowdown-Drain Piping: [200 deg F (93 deg C)] 3. Air-Vent Piping: [200 deg F (93 deg C)] 4. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to which

it is attached.

2.2 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Section 230523.11 "Globe Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping."

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Section 230923.11 "Control Valves."Section 15901 "Control Valves."

C. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Taco. c. Victaulic Company.

2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

D. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Taco. c. Victaulic Company.

2. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 5. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 6. Seat: PTFE. 7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=3380

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456942350









10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

E. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASME labeled. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Low inlet-pressure check valve. 8. Inlet Strainer: <Insert materials>, removable without system shutdown. 9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed,

with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

F. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves: ASME labeled. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand. c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. 8. Inlet Strainer: <Insert materials>, removable without system shutdown. 9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

G. Automatic Flow-Control Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Flow Design, Inc. b. Griswold Controls. c. NuTech Hydronic Specialty Products.

2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: [Stainless steel] [Corrosion resistant], tamper proof, self-

cleaning, and removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bronze or brass-alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure

fluctuations. 8. Minimum CWP Rating: [175 psig (1207 kPa)] [300 psig (2070 kPa)]. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: [200 deg F (93 deg C)] [250 deg F (121 deg C)].















2.3 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manual Air Vents: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand. c. Taco, Inc.

2. Body: Bronze. 3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 4. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 6. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 7. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

B. Automatic Air Vents: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the


2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 4. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 6. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. 7. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

C. Air Purgers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the


2. Body: Cast iron with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air from solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal.

3. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig. 4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.4 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger. 3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, [40] mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).

B. Basket Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain

connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.















3. Strainer Screen: [40] mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

C. T-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer

maintenance. 2. End Connections: Grooved ends. 3. Strainer Screen: [40] -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 57

percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 750 psig.

D. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective

jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

E. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body. 2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges. 3. Performance: Capable of misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

F. Expansion Fittings: Comply with requirements in Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping."Section 15124 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install [balancing] valves at each branch connection to return main.

C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.



3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Install manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank.



WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 232513 - 1

SECTION 232513 - WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following water treatment for closed-loop hydronic systems:

1. Automatic chemical-feed equipment. 2. Chemicals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories for the following products:

1. Bypass feeders. 2. TSS controllers. 3. Chemical solution tanks. 4. Chemical test equipment. 5. Chemical material safety data sheets.

B. Shop Drawings: Pretreatment and chemical treatment equipment showing tanks, maintenance space required, and piping connections to hydronic systems.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.



B. Water Analysis Provider Qualifications: Verification of experience and capability of HVAC water-treatment service provider.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Water-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For bypass feeder to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water-treatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain water conditions required above to inhibit corrosion and scale formation for hydronic piping and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion and shall include the following:

1. Initial water analysis and HVAC water-treatment recommendations. 2. Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems, clean with detergents, and initially

fill systems with required chemical treatment prior to operation. 3. Periodic field service and consultation. 4. Customer report charts and log sheets. 5. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with

government regulations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Neptune

B. Nalco




A. Water quality for hydronic systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of hydronic equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or the environment.

B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, hydronic system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Closed hydronic systems, including [hot-water heating] [chilled water] [dual-temperature water] [and] [glycol cooling], shall have the following water qualities:

1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5. 2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm. 3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm. 4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm. 5. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm. 6. TSS: Maintain a maximum value of [10 ppm. 7. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 8. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 9. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/mL. b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL. c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL. d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL. e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.

2.3 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the vessel.

1. Capacity: 5 gal.. 2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.

2.4 CHEMICALS

A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system components and connected equipment and that can attain water quality specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER ANALYSIS

A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.

B. Install seismic restraints for equipment and floor-mounting accessories and anchor to building structure. Comply with requirements in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for seismic restraints.

C. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment.

D. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical treatment controls and sensors.

E. Mount sensors and injectors in piping circuits.

F. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including [hot-water heating] [chilled water] and equipped with the following:

1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. Install water meter in makeup-water supply. 3. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless otherwise

indicated on Drawings. 4. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below the feeder

inlet. 5. Install a swing check on the inlet after the isolation valve.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.

B. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal piping with dielectric fittings. Comply with requirements in Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."

C. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Section 230523.11 "Globe Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping."

D. Comply with requirements in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers required in makeup-water connections to potable-water systems.

E. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in electrical Sections for connecting electrical equipment.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.



B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections.

2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water-treatment system.

3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of hydronic systems' startup procedures.

4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved.

5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects.

8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.

C. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. At four-week intervals following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on hydronic systems to show that automatic chemical-feed systems are maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section. Submit written reports of water analysis advising Owner of changes necessary to adhere to "Performance Requirements" Article.

F. Comply with ASTM D 3370 and with the following standards:

1. Silica: ASTM D 859. 2. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067. 3. Iron: ASTM D 1068. 4. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment.

B. Training: Provide a "how-to-use" self-contained breathing apparatus video that details exact operating procedures of equipment.



DUCTWORK 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. This section includes low pressure ductwork and fittings. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and air-distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by the College Representative. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

B. Duct Pressure and Leakage Testing to be preformed by the Mechanical Contractor. The AABC Test and Balance Contractor shall verify all leakage tests. Mechanical contractor shall submit all test reports.

C. All mechanical equipment and hardware shall be braced or anchored to resist horizontal force acting in any direction according to 2013 CBC, Section 1632A Using Ca = 0.44 and Ip = 1.15. Where anchorage details are not shown on the drawings, the installation shall be subject to the approval of the mechanical engineer and the field engineer of the Division of the State Architect. Ductwork and piping shall be in strict accordance with SMACNA Guidelines for Restraint of Mechanical Systems, Including Supplement Dated 2000 for Seismic Level “AA”.



ASTM A36 Structural Steel. ASTM A90 Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or

Steel Articles. ASTM A480 General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and

Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. ASTM A653 General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated

(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. ASTM A666 Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat

Bar. ASTM B209 Standard Specification of Aluminum Alloy Sheet and

Plate which references ANSI Standard H-35.2 Dimen-sional Tolerances for Aluminum Mill Products.

ASTM D9.1 Welding of Sheet Metal. ASTM C920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for surface burning characteris-

tics. NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. NFPA 90B Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning

Systems.


DUCTWORK 233113 - 2

NFPA 91 Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Vapors, Gases, Mists, Noncombustible Particulate Solids.

NFPA 96 Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment.

NFPA 211 Standard for chimney, fireplaces, vents and solid fuel-burning appliances.

NFPA 318 Protection of Cleanrooms. SMACNA ADLTM HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. SMACNA DCS HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. UL181 Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors. CMC California Mechanical Code UL727 Standard for surface burning characteristics

B. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission from the College Representative. Upon written permission size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.

C. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and other applicable Standards mentioned above.

D. Ducts shall be located away from hot equipment such as furnaces and un-insulated pipes to avoid excess temperature exposure.

E. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

F. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience.

G. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and 90B standards. Duct gauges shall conform to CAC Title 24 and CMC unless otherwise specified in this section.

H. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.

I. Exhaust system shall comply with CMC Section 505 and 506. Hot gas exhaust ductwork shall conform to CMC Section 816, 817 and 818. Both systems shall comply also to NFPA 91.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 23 00 00 for additional requirements.

B. Provide: 1. Shop drawings: provide 1/4” = 1’ duct layout drawings indicating duct fittings, particulars

such as gauges, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work as required by section 23 00 00.

2. Product data: provide data for duct materials and joints. 3. Show details of fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations,

sections, components, and attachments to other work. Duct layout indicating pressure classifications and sizes on plans. Fittings. Reinforcement and spacing. Seam and joint construction. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. Terminal unit, coil


DUCTWORK 233113 - 3

installations. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, seismic restraints, and duct attachment.

4. Coordination drawings: ductwork plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show other systems installed in same space as ducts. Access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers duct cleanout. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.

5. Welding certificates: copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in "quality assurance" article.

6. Field test reports: indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

7. Duct pressure and leakage testing method and procedure.


A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 00 00.

B. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: 1. Lock-forming quality conforming to ASTM A653, A653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation. 2. Mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B. Stainless Steel Ducts: 1. Ductwork shall conform to ASTM A666 Type 316 L stainless steel for ducts from lab fume

hoods to lab fan intake plenum. 2. Provide ASTM A480 No. 4 finish for ducts exposed to view and No. 2 finish for concealed

ducts.

C. Insulated Flexible Ducts: 1. UL labeled black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire with

fiberglass insulation and polyethylene vapor barrier film. 2. Pressure rating shall be minimum 4 inches WG positive and 0.5 inches WG negative. 3. Maximum velocity requirements is 4000 fpm. 4. Temperature range of -20°F to 175°F. 5. Manufacturer shall be Casco SilentFlex II.

D. Fasteners: 1. Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws shall be cadmium plated. 2. Provide stainless steel fasteners for all stainless steel ductwork.

E. Sealant: 1. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl

sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids. 2. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants,

complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.


DUCTWORK 233113 - 4

3. Non-hardening, water-resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with heavy mastic.

F. Hanger Materials: 1. ASTM A36; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously

threaded. 2. Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod. 3. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres (Lab Areas): Electro galvanized, all-thread

rod. 4. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--

Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. 5. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;

compatible with duct materials. 6. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Supports

for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.

2.2 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. All ductwork shall be constructed to meet SMACNA requirements in the latest edition of SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible”. Unless otherwise indicated, provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. Circular ducts shall be spirally seamed or longitudinally seamed if system pressure is equal to or less than 2 inches water column only.

B. Transverse Joints: Ductmate, WDCI, or equal proprietary duct connection systems will be accepted for galvanized ductwork. Ductwork constructed using these systems will refer to the manufacturers guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcements. Duct sizes 18” wide and larger, which have more than 10 square feet of un-braced panel, shall be beaded or cross broken every 12 in. This requirement is applicable to 20 gauge or less thickness and 3 in. wg. or less for system pressure.

TDC/TDF/T-24 shall be constructed as a SMACNA T-24 flange. Use of these joint systems shall be limited as follows: Duct Size Operating Pressure 0 - 42” 0 - 2” W.G. 1. Longitudinal Seams: 2. Pittsburgh Lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams. 3. All longitudinal seams will be sealed with mastic sealant. Snaplock is not acceptable. 4. All exhaust ducts shall be continuously welded on the longitudinal seams and transverse

joints. a. Joint Sealant/Mastic: Shall be flexible, water-based, adhesive sealant designed for

use in all pressure duct systems. After curing, it shall be resistant to ultraviolet light and shall prevent the entry of water, air and moisture into the duct system.

b. Sealer shall be UL 723 listed and meet NFPA requirements for Class 1 ductwork.

C. Spiral Seams: Lockseam shall be used on all spiral seams. Snaplock is not acceptable.

D. Ductboard: Fiberglass ductboard will not be accepted.

E. The Contractor will be required to replace proprietary duct construction and transverse joining systems that are installed without authorization.


DUCTWORK 233113 - 5

F. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide extended trailing edge turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

G. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.

H. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gauges heavier than duct gauges indicated in SMACNA Standard. 1. Joints: 0” - 20” diameter, interior slip coupling beaded at center, fastened to duct with

screws and with sealing compound applied continuously around joint before assembling and after fastening. Wrap joints with 3 inch wide duct tape.

2. Joint 22” - 72” diameter, use 3 piece, gasketed, flanged joints consisting of 2 internal flanges (with integral mastic sealant) split to accommodate minor differences in duct diameter, and one external closure bank designed to compress gasketing between internal flanges. Example: Ductmate Spiralmate or equal.

3. Joints 74” diameter and up, use companion angle flanged joints only gasketed and bolted. Ductwall to be welded longitudinal seams.

I. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated. Branches may also have 45 degree entry with a minimum transition of 4” to duct dimensions and a clinch lock or spin-in lock per Fig.2-6, SMACNA HVAC DCS. Fit all connections to avoid visible openings and secure them suitably for the pressure class used.

J. Welding: 1. Preparation for Welding: Dirt, grease, forming or machining lubricants, or any organic

material shall be removed from the areas to be welded by cleaning with a suitable solvent or by vapor degreasing. The oxide coating shall be removed just prior to welding. This may be done by etching or scratch brushing. Suitable edge preparation to assure 100% penetration in butt welds shall be used.

2. Cutting: Material may be sheared, sawed, cut with a router, or arc cut. All edges which have been cut by the arc process shall be planed to remove edge cracks. Cut edges shall be true and smooth, and free from excessive burrs or ragged breaks. Re-entrant cuts shall be avoided wherever possible. If used, they shall be filleted by drilling prior to cutting. Oxygen cutting of aluminum alloys shall not be permitted.

3. Welding Procedure: Duct shall be welded with an inert gas shielded arc or resistance welding process. No welding process that requires a welding flux shall be used. Other filler metal alloys may be used provided they meet qualification test requirements, and result in welds with the listed alloy filler. Pre-heating for welding is permissible, provided the temperature does not exceed 400ºF for a total of 30 minutes.

4. Rewelding Defects: Portions of joints that have been rejected on inspection because of defects may be repaired by rewelding only. The defective area shall be removed by chipping or machining. Flame cutting shall not be used before rewelding. The joints shall be inspected to assure that all defective weld metal has been removed and that the joint is accessible so that the welding operator can obtain full penetration through the joint. All welding shall comply to ASTM D9.1.

2.3 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA DCS, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.


DUCTWORK 233113 - 6

2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics. 1. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced. 2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound

and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.

3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All mechanical equipment and hardware shall be braced or anchored to resist horizontal force acting in any direction according to 2013 CBC, Section 1632A Using Ca = 0.44 and Ip = 1.15. Where anchorage details are not shown on the drawings, the installation shall be subject to the approval of the mechanical engineer and the field engineer of the Division of the State Architect. Ductwork and piping shall be in strict accordance with SMACNA Guidelines for Restraint of Mechanical Systems, Including Supplement Dated 2000 for Seismic Level “AA”.

B. Install manufactured ductwork and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Ducts shall be independently supported from building structure, and not from other equipment or other equipment supports unless specifically shown on drawings or approved by the Engineer.

C. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA DCS and SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

D. Contractor shall verify all dimensions at the site, making all field measurements and shop drawings necessary for fabrication and erection of sheet metal work. Make allowances for beams, pipes and other obstructions in building construction and for Work of other Sections. Check Drawings showing Work of other trades and consult with the Owner in the event of potential interference.

E. Duct sizes are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining and refer to Section 15290 for liner requirements.

F. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

G. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.

H. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inches and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow.


DUCTWORK 233113 - 7

I. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

J. Fabricate ductwork in a workmanlike manner with airtight joints, presenting smooth surfaces on inside, neatly finished on outside, construct with curves, bends, turning vanes to aid the easy flow of air.

K. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts directly per details indicated on the drawings.

L. Provide seismic transverse and longitudinal bracing for ductwork per Section 23 05 48.

M. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

N. All exposed ductwork and supports shall be primed and painted. All ductwork shall be considered exposed unless concealed in shafts or ceiling spaces. Color to be selected by the Owner.

O. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

P. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated combination fire/smoke damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."

Q. Upon completion of ductwork, Mechanical Contractor shall wrap the bottoms of all ducts below 12'-0" above finished floor in open areas, with 1" thick Armaflex (or equal) in a manner to prevent head injuries.

R. All individual branch supply, return, exhaust, etc. ductwork shall be provided with manual volume dampers.

S. Paint the inside of all ducts with flat black paint extending as far as visible, including backs of grilles and registers.

T. All exposed ductwork shall be painted. Coordinate with the College and Architect.

U. Stainless Steel Ductwork: 1. There shall be no variation of lab duct configuration or sizes without written permission

from the College Representative. 2. Fabricate tees, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct

on center line. 3. Maximum divergence upstream of equipment to be 30°. Maximum convergence at

transitions and downstream of equipment to be 45°. 4. Seams at the fan suction riser, at the fan suction header, in the fan discharge duct, and at

all fittings shall be welded. All other seams shall be grooved lock if 20 gauge or thinner (with external sealant), or welded if 18 gauge or thicker.

5. Joints at the fan suction riser, at the fan suction header, in the fan discharge duct, and at all fittings shall be welded. All other joints up to 36" diameter shall have 6" shrink wrap covered by a continuous wrap of 8" wide tape to cover over the shrink wrap a total of 12".


DUCTWORK 233113 - 8

Joints larger than 36" diameter shall be flanged with Teflon® coated neoprene gaskets and A-307 bolts, or welded.

6. Provide pitot tube openings for testing of systems, complete with metal cam with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

7. Clean ductwork as it is installed to remove dirt and dust. During installation, close duct openings and open ends with temporary covers to keep construction dust out of duct systems.

8. Construct ductwork with sufficient clearance around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities of equipment.

9. At each point where ducts pass through partitions, seal joints around duct with noncombustible material. Where ducts pass through openings in the roof or the penthouse floor, provide flashing to create a waterproof seal.

10. Install ducts and supports in accordance with details and SMACNA Industrial Duct Construction Standards. Adequately attach hangers to the building structure. Provide saddle-type duct supports for round ducts on roof.

11. Seal all joints with materials per Paragraph 2.2.G. to classification per Paragraph 2.3. 12. Provide exhaust ductwork mains and low points with a matching pipe drain section, 12"

minimum length, provided with a tee and a stainless steel manual ball valve fitted to the bottom of the section. Cap the side outlet of the tee for a future leak detector.

13. Where shown as extensions of existing exhaust systems, provide complete stack assemblies including guy wires, stack collars, eye bolts, anchor plates, etc.

3.2 Duct Pressure / Leakage Testing

A. Mechanical contractor shall conduct leakage test on the entire ductwork system. Mechanical contractor shall coordinate with Test and Balance Agency, the College and Engineer for witness and certification of all tests. Tests shall be performed prior to installing ductwork insulation. Mechanical contractor shall submit test reports to the Test and Balance Contractor for review prior to final review by the College Representative.

B. Systems shall be inspected and tested to positive pressures, in accordance with the following: 1. There are no visible mechanical defects. 2. There is no audible leakage at any point when area ambient noise is at normal-

occupancy level.

C. Measured total system leakage shall not exceed 1% of total system cubic feet per minute (cfm) when tested in accordance with "Leak Tests".

D. Leak Tests: Test apparatus and procedures shall be similar in all respects to those defined in SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual or AABC standards. 1. Filtered blower inlet and automatic safety relief device where necessary shall be provided

to protect system. 2. Accuracy of measurement of leakage flow rate shall be certified to be within 1 percent of

total system flow.

E. Test Apparatus shall consist of the following: 1. A source of high pressure air - a portable rotary blower or tank type vacuum cleaner. 2. A flow measuring device usually an orifice assembly consisting of straightening vanes

and an orifice plate mounted in a straight tube with properly located pressure taps. Each orifice assembly shall be accurately calibrated to its own calibration curve. Pressure and flow readings are usually taken with a differential pressure meter.

F. Test Procedures:


DUCTWORK 233113 - 9

1. Test for audible leaks as follows: a. Close off and seal openings in the duct section to be tested. Connect the test

apparatus to the duct by means of a flexible duct section. b. Start the blower with its control damper closed (some small blowers popularly used

for testing ducts may damage the duct because they can develop pressures up to 25 inches w.g.).

c. Gradually open the inlet damper until the duct pressure reaches 0.5 inches w.g. greater than duct pressure class. Test pressure is read on the differential pressure meter.

d. Survey joints for audible leaks. Mark each leak and repair after shutting down blower. Do not apply a retest until sealants have set.

2. After all audible leaks have been sealed, the remaining leakage should be measured with the test apparatus orifice section as follows: a. Start blower and open damper until duct pressure reaches 25 percent in excess of

design duct operating pressure. b. Read the pressure differential across the orifice on meter No. 2. Leakage rate in

cfm is read directly from the calibration curve. If leakage does not occur, the pressure differential will be zero.

c. Total allowable leakage should not exceed 5 percent of the total system design air flow rate. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage.

d. If all audible leaks have been corrected, it is unlikely that the measured leakage will exceed one percent of capacity. If it does, the leaks shall be located by careful listening or feeling along the joint.

e. It should be noted that even though a system may pass the measured leakage test, a concentration of leakage at one point may result in a noisy leak that shall be corrected.

G. If specimen fails to meet allotted leakage level, the Contractor shall modify to bring it into compliance and shall retest it until acceptable leakage is demonstrated.

H. Tests and necessary repair shall be completed prior to concealment of ducts.

I. Test Report: A test report shall be provided for each system tested, identified by system or section thereof, and containing leak-test curves for apparatus used and data pertinent to acceptance requirements.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Cleaning of General Service Ductwork: Remove debris from general-purpose ductwork and accessories, and then blow ductwork and accessories, and then blow ductwork clean with air movement provided by the system fan or blower. Supply ductwork shall be blown clean before final branch connections are made to terminal units, or before terminal grilles, registers, or diffusers are installed.

B. General Cleaning: Clean up and remove refuse material, crates, and rubbish arising from work of this Section from the premises.

3.4 SCHEDULES

A. Ductwork Material Schedule


DUCTWORK 233113 - 10

B. Air System Material General Exhaust Galvanized Steel Supply and Return Air Galvanized Steel

C. Minimum Ductwork Pressure and Seal Classes

SMACNA SMACNA RECT / ROUND SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS SEAL CLASS LEAKAGE CLASS Supply and Return 2 inch W.G. C 24 / 12 Exhaust 2 inch W.G. C 24 / 12 Supply and Return 3 inch W.G. B 12 / 6 Exhaust 3 inch W.G. B 12 / 6 Supply and Return 4, 6, 10 inch W.G. A 6 / 3 Exhaust 4, 6, 10 inch W.G. A 6 / 3 Class A: 4”w.g.and above; all transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations. Class B: 3”w.g.; all transverse joints and longitudinal seams only. Class C: 2”w.g.; transverse joints only.

Duct Leakage Classifications



AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 – 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies ductwork accessories such as volume control dampers, backdraft dampers, air turning vanes, flexible duct connections, duct access doors, duct test holes, combination fire smoke dampers and intake vents.



NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. UL 33 Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service. UL 555 Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.

B. Provide shop drawings for shop fabricated assemblies indicated, including volume control dampers and duct access doors. Provide product data for hardware used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.

B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches.

C. Fabricate splitter dampers of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action flanged bushing with set screw.

D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 12 x 48 inch.

E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.



F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.

G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.

H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters.

2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Manufactures shall be Ruskin, Greenheck or equal.

B. Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18 x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction.

C. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers of extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure; Model BD6 manufactured by Ruskin.

2.3 AIR TURNING VANES

A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; blades shall have long trailing edges; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. Manufacturer shall be Aero/Dyne or equal (no known equal).

2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturer: Ventfrabrics or equal (no known equal).

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.

C. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd, approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip.

D. Leaded vinyl sheet, minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.87 lbs per sq ft, 10 dB attenuation in 10 to 10,000 Hz range.

2.5 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Manufacturers shall be Ventfrabrics, Ductmate, Pottorf Company or equal.

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and as indicated.

C. Review locations prior to fabrication.



D. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.

E. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks.

F. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes.

G. Access doors in round ducts shall be Ductmate, United Sheet Metal Type AR-W Peabody, Wind Spiromatic, Spiro-Duct or equal.

H. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.6 DUCT TEST HOLES

A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.

2.7 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS (MUST BE CSFM LISTED)

A. Manufacturer shall be Greenheck, Ruskin or equal.

B. Combination Smoke/Fire Dampers shall be furnished and installed at all locations shown on the plans and/or as described on the drawing details.

C. Damper shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A, 92A, and 92B and further shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest edition on UL Standard 555 and 555S. Dampers shall have a UL555 fire rating of 1-1/2 hours and be of low leakage design qualified to UL 555S Leakage Class I.

D. Damper actuator combination shall have a UL 555S elevated temperature rating of 350 degrees Fahrenheit minimum and shall be operational and dynamic rated to operate at maximum design airflow rate at its installed location.

E. Damper shall be supplied with an appropriate actuator installed by the damper manufacturer at the time of damper fabrication. Damper actuator shall be electric type for 120 volt operation.

F. Damper blades shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel 3 Vee type with three longitudinal grooves for reinforcement. Damper frame shall be galvanized steel formed into a structural hat channel shape with reinforced corners. Bearing shall be sintered bronze sleeve type rotating in extruded holes in the damper frame. Blade seals shall be silicone rubber designed to inflate and provide a tighter seal against leakage as pressure on either side of the damper increases. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel compression type with silicone rubber backing. Blades shall be completely symmetrical relative to their axle pivot point, presenting identical resistance to airflow in either direction or pressure on either side of the damper.



G. Damper must be rated for mounting vertically (with blades running horizontally) or horizontally and be UL 555S rated for leakage and airflow in either direction through the damper.

H. Damper shall be supplied with a 165 degree Fahrenheit fusible link. Provide access doors at either side of the combination smoke/fire damper for viewing of the fusible links.

I. The specified combination smoke/fire damper shall meet the requirements for fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire smoke dampers established by: 1. National Fire Protection Association NFPA Standard 90A, 92A, 92B and 101 2. Underwriters Laboratories Standard 555 Listing #R-13317 3. Underwriters Laboratories Standard 555S Listing #R-13447 4. California State Fire Marshall CSFM Fire Damper Listing #3225-0981:103 5. California State Fire Marshall CSFM Leakage Smoke Damper Listing #3230-0981:104

2.8 AIR DUCT SILENCERS

A. Furnish and install "Quiet-Duct" (rectangular) and "Conic-Flow" (tubular) silencers of the types and sizes shown on the plans and/or listed in the schedule. Silencers shall be the product of Industrial Acoustics Company. Any specification change must be submitted in writing and approved by the Architect/Engineer, in writing, at least 10 days prior to the bid due-date.

B. Outer casings of rectangular silencers shall be made of 22 gauge type #G-90 lock former quality galvanized steel.

C. Outer casings of tubular silencers shall be made of type #G-90 lock former quality galvanized steel in the following gauges:

OUTSIDE DIA. METAL GAUGE 12-36 in. 22 ga. 38-60 in. 18 ga.

D. Interior partitions for rectangular silencers shall be not less than 26 gauge type #G-90 galvanized lock former quality perforated steel. Interior construction of tubular silencers shall be compatible with the respective outside casing.

E. Filler material shall be inorganic glass fiber of a proper density to obtain the specified acoustic performance and be packed under not less than 5% compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and settling. Material shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof.

F. Combustion ratings for the silencer acoustic fill shall be not greater than the following when tested to ASTM E 84, NFPA Standard 255, or UL No. 723:

Flamespread Classification............20 Smoke Development Rating..........20

G. CONSTRUCTION - 1. Units shall be constructed in accordance with the ASHRAE Guide recommendations for

high pressure duct work. Seams shall be lock formed and mastic filled. Rectangular casing seams shall be in the corners of the silencer shell to provide maximum unit strength and rigidity. Interior partitions shall be fabricated from single piece, margin perforated sheets and shall have die-formed entrance and exit shapes so as to provide the maximum aerodynamic efficiency and minimum self-noise characteristics in the sound attenuator. Blunt noses or squared off partitions will not be accepted.



2. Attachment of the interior partitions to the casing shall be by means of an interlocking track assembly. Tracks shall be solid galvanized steel and shall be welded to the outer casing. Attachment of the interior partitions to the tracks shall be such that a minimum of 4 thickness's of metal exist at this location. The track assembly shall stiffen the exterior casing, provide a reinforced attachment detail for the interior partitions, and shall maintain a uniform airspace width along the length of the silencer for consistent aerodynamic and acoustic performance. Interior partitions shall be additionally secured to the outer casing with welded nose clips at both ends of the sound attenuator.

3. Interior partitions for tubular silencers shall be secured with galvanized steel radial mounting brackets welded to the partition and the outer casing. The radial brackets shall be installed full length and at 120 degree angles to each other to assure uniform spacing for consistent aerodynamic and acoustic performance.

4. Sound attenuating units shall not fail structurally when subjected to a differential air pressure of 8 inches water gauge from inside to outside the casing. Airtight construction shall be provided by use of a duct sealing compound on the job site material and labor furnished by the contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.

C. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment such as air handling units and exhaust fans.

D. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at combination fire/smoke dampers as required for access. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated.

E. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.



FANS 233416 - 1

SECTION 233416 - FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. This section specifies exhaust fans.


A. References: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. AMCA 99 Standards Handbook. AMCA 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. AMCA 300 Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. AMCA 301 Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. UL 705 Power Ventilators.

1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 00 00.

B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide one extra set of belts for each fan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ALUMINUM ROOF FAN

A. Manufacturer shall be Greenheck Model Cube, Loren Cook or Penn.

B. Product Requirements: 1. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 2. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating

Seal. 3. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. 4. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in

accordance with UL 705.

C. Performance: As scheduled on Drawings.


FANS 233416 - 2

D. Description: 1. Fan shall be a spun aluminum, roof mounted, belt driven, upblast, standard finish

centrifugal exhaust ventilator. 2. Selected fans shall be capable of accommodating static pressure and flow variations of

minimum +/-20% of scheduled values.

E. Construction: 1. Fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. 2. Spun aluminum structural components shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge marine

alloy aluminum, bolted to a rigid aluminum support structure. 3. Aluminum base shall have a one piece inlet spinning and continuously welded curb cap

corners for maximum leak protection. Windband shall have a rolled bead for added strength and shall be joined to curbcaps with a leakproof, continuously welded seam.

4. Provide integral conduit chase shall be provided into the motor compartment to facilitate wiring connections.

5. Motor, bearings and drives shall be mounted on a minimum 14 gauge steel power assembly, isolated from the unit structure with rubber vibration isolators.

6. All components shall be enclosed in a weather-tight compartment, separated from the exhaust airstream.

7. Lifting lugs shall be provided to help prevent damage from improper lifting. 8. Unit shall bear weatherproof, engraved aluminum nameplate. Nameplate shall indicate

design CFM, static pressure, and maximum fan RPM.

F. Wheel: 1. Wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include

a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. 2. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 3. Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-96, Balance Quality

and Vibration Levels for Fans.

G. Motor: 1. Motors shall be high efficiency, heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan

load, and furnished at the specified voltage and phase. 2. Motors and drives shall be mounted on vibration isolators, out of the airstream. 3. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment from an area free

of discharge contaminants. 4. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance. 5. Motor enclosure shall be Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC). 6. For VFD controlled Fans, provide motor with shaft grounding.

H. Bearings: 1. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed,

lubricated pillow block ball bearings. 2. Construction shall be heavy duty regreasable ball type in a cast iron pillow block housing

selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed.

I. Belts and Drives: 1. Belts shall be oil and heat resistant, non-static type. 2. Drives shall be precision machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the

wheel and motor shafts. 3. Drive frame assemblies shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and mounted on

vibration isolators. 4. Drives shall be sized for 150 percent of the installed motor horsepower. 5. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the

wheel and motor shafts.


FANS 233416 - 3

6. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing.

J. Accessories: 1. Gravity operated, heavy duty, aluminum back draft damper.

a. Back draft damper is not required for relief fan (RF-101). 2. Aluminum bird screen. 3. Provide with 1’-0” high aluminum curb with internal liner. 4. Lifting lugs. 5. Performance baffle as required to meet design conditions. 6. Motor enclosure shall be Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide sheaves required for final air balance.

C. Install gravity actuated dampers on inlet to roof exhausters.

D. Do not operate fans for any purpose, bearings are lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.


Project No: 7902 Building 3000 October 4, 2017 Fullerton College

CUSTOM AIR HANDLING UNITS 237413 – 1

SECTION 237413 - CUSTOM AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. Furnish and install all Air Handling Units as shown on Drawings and herein specified.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Piping Materials and Methods 2. Piping Specialties 3. Gages and Thermometers 4. Supports Anchors and Guides 5. Electric Motors 6. Mechanical Identification 7. Vibration Isolators 8. Hydronic Piping 9. Condensate Piping System 10. Air Coils 11. Air Filters 12. Centrifugal Fans 13. Duct Accessories 14. Direct Digital Control Systems 15. Testing Adjusting and Balancing 16. HVAC System Commissioning

C. Work by Others: 1. Installation of the entire temperature control system, including all electrical control wiring

internal and external to the air handling unit(s). 2. Installation of support structure and associated roof work.

1.2 UNIT REQUIREMENTS:

A. This section specifies the custom, air handling unit, accessories and hardware required for this project. Furnish and deliver to the job site six custom air handling units, which meet the requirements of this section and the mechanical drawings and delivered to University’s Representative.

B. Equipment Requirements:

Electrical Listing Unit shall be UL or ETL listed.

Power Connections Unit shall have single point fused disconnect for 208 V/3ph power and separate single connection for 120V power for internal lights.




A. The manufacturer, contractor or supplier shall include a written statement that the submitted equipment, hardware, or accessory complies with the requirement of this particular specification section. 1. The manufacturer shall resubmit this specification section showing compliance with each

respective paragraphs and specified items and features. 2. All exceptions shall be clearly identified by referencing respective paragraph and other

requirements along with proposed alternative. 3. Individual or partial submittals are not acceptable and will be returned without review.

B. Submittals: 1. All electrical, piping, and ductwork requirements, including sizes, connection locations,

and connection method recommendations. 2. Each component of the unit shall be identified. Mechanical specifications describing

construction, components, and options shall be provided for the unit and all accessories. All performance data, including capacities and airside and waterside pressure drops, for components.

3. Fan curves shall be provided for fans with the design operating points indicated. Data shall be corrected to actual operating conditions, temperatures, and altitudes.

4. A filter schedule must be provided for each air handling unit supplied by the air handling unit manufacturer. Schedule shall detail unit tag, unit size, corresponding filter section location within the AHU, filter arrangement (e.g. angled/flat), filter depth, filter type (e.g. pleated media), MERV rating, and filter quantity and size.

5. A schedule detailing necessary trap height shall be provided for each air handling unit. Schedule shall detail unit tag, unit size, appropriate trap schematic with recommended trap dimensions, and unit supplied base rail height. Contractor shall be responsible for additional trap height required for trapping and insulation beyond the unit supplied base rail height by adequate housekeeping pad.

6. An electrical MCA - MOP schedule shall be provided for each electrical circuit to which field-power must be supplied. Schedule to detail unit tag, circuit description, voltage/phase/hertz, Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA), and calculated Maximum Overcurrent Protection (MOP).

7. Variable frequency drive (VFD) and motor data. 8. Sound Test for the AHU in accordance with AMCA Standard 300-96, Reverberant Room

Method for sound testing of fans, and where relevant, AHRI Standard 260-01, Sound Ratings of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment. Airflow measuring device performance ratings in accordance with AMCA 611.

9. Static pressure profiles by component section. 10. Casing leakage rate at +/- 10”/ [12”] w.g., specified in terms of percentage of design

airflow. 11. Panel deflection data.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, load distribution, required


2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Structural supports. 2. Piping roughing-in requirements. 3. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equipment.



4. Access requirements including working clearances for mechanical controls and electrical equipment, tube pull clearances, and service clearances.

B. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each air handling unit, provide emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Warranty


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-handling units and components.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Unit shall be manufactured to conform to UL 1995 and shall be listed by either UL/CUL or ETL. Units shall be provided with listing agency label affixed to the unit. In the event the unit is not UL/CUL or ETL approved, the contractor shall, at his/her expense, provide for a field inspection by a UL/CUL or ETL representative to verify conformance.

B. Certify air handling coils in accordance with AHRI Standard 410. Units shall be provided with certification label affixed to the unit. If air handling coils are not certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410, contractor shall be responsible for expenses associated with testing of coils after installation to verify performance of coil(s). Any costs incurred to adjust coils to meet scheduled capacities shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units.

B. Units shall ship fully assembled up to practical shipping and rigging limitations. Units not shipped fully assembled shall have tags and airflow arrows on each section to indicate location and orientation in direction of airflow. Shipping splits shall be clearly defined on submittal drawings. Cost associated with non-conformance to shop drawings shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer. Each section shall have lifting lugs for field rigging, lifting and final placement of AHU section(s). AHU's less than 100-inches wide shall allow for forklift transport and maneuverability on the jobsite.

C. Deliver units to jobsite with fan motor(s), sheave(s), and belt(s) completely assembled and mounted in units.

D. Unit shall be shipped in a clear shrink-wrap or stretch-wrap to protect unit from in-transit rain



and debris per ASHRAE 62.1 recommendations.

E. Installing contractor shall be responsible for storing AHU in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall provide, at no additional cost, a standard parts warranty that covers a period of one year from unit start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first. This warrants that all products are free from defects in material and workmanship and shall meet the capacities and ratings set forth in the equipment manufacturer's catalog and bulletins.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Scott Springfield

B. Air Zone

C. Energy Labs

E. Or approved equal.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNIT

A. Manufacturer shall provide indoor, integral base frame unit to support and raise all sections of the unit for proper trapping.

2.3 CASING

A. Walls and roof shall be acoustic panels with panel sizes not to exceed 24". Provide a double wall unit with wall seams that are turned inward to provide a clean, flush unit exterior. All wall panels shall be secured on 8" centers without the use of mechanical fasteners. All panel seams shall be caulked with clear silicone applied after the unit has been painted.

• AH-1, AH-2 - 2" wall and roof, 16-gauge steel exterior casing.

B. Wash-down liner shall be of thermal break construction with gasket between inner and outer wall skin. All mechanical fasteners shall have rubber washers.

• AH-1, AH-2 - 22 gauge G90 wash-down interior liner.

C. The insulation minimum density shall be 4 lbs/ft³ and a minimum conductivity factor shall be 0.23 Btu.in/ft².hr.°F Insulation minimum sound absorption coefficient shall be 1.05. All insulation and accessories including sealants must have a composite fire and smoke hazard rating of 25/50 per ASTM E-84 and UL 723.

• AH-1, AH-2 - 2" insulation.

D. The unit shall meet a deflection criteria of 1/300 of the panel span at 10 "w.g. and the air



handling unit manufacturer shall provide a casing deflection test (upon request) to indicate compliance. If the casing cannot meet the deflection criteria; the manufacturer shall provide additional internal reinforcement.

E. The unit casing shall meet a leakage rate of 1.0% or less of the total airflow, on both positive and negative pressure sections at 10 "w.g..

F. Casing panels shall be tested in accordance to ASTM Standard C-423 for sound absorption and ASTM E90-90 for transmission loss.

• AH-1, AH-2 - NRC of .95 or greater and STC of 35 or greater.

2.4 BASE

A. Unit shall be constructed on a structural C-channel perimeter base with intermediate channel and angle support. Units that exceed 24 ft. shall have an 8" minimum base rail. Regardless of the frame size, the channel shall meet a deflection criteria of 1/240" for an unsupported span.

• AH-1, AH-2 - structural steel channel.

B. Provide floor fully welded to the intermediate support members and all seams shall be continuously welded. Floors that are attached with screws or adhesive sealants are not acceptable.

• AH-1, AH-2 - 12-gauge steel flat floor.

C. The base shall be insulated with polyurethane foam or fiberglass sheeted with an unpainted, galvanized liner.

• AH-1, AH-2 - 2" spray foam insulation.

D. The base pan shall have an integral 1.5" water dam including all floor penetrations. Base shall be provided with a minimum four (4) structural lifting lugs per section. Manufacturers who cannot provide a water dam constructible are not acceptable.

• AH-1, AH-2 - weld-on lifting lugs.

E. All drain connections shall be extended through the unit base rail and capped. Minimum drain size shall be 1.25". Drains shall be steel or copper pipe.

2.5 ACCESS DOORS

A. Access doors shall be double walled with 16-gauge galvanized steel exterior and 22-gauge solid interior panel. Doors must be of the same thickness as the wall. Provide a reinforced door frame so that the opening remains square during manufacturing and installation. Door frames which are formed from the casing wall are not acceptable. Door insulation shall be 4 lbs/ft³. For door options, please see equipment detail sheet.



B. Doors shall be sealed continuously with a double gasket arrangement with a neoprene "knife edge" seal and a 3/4" automotive bulb seal. Seals requiring pop rivet or screwed attachment are not acceptable. Doors with a single gasket sealing system are not acceptable. Minimum door opening to be 24" x 72", height permitting.

C. Doors shall have a minimum of two (2) glass-reinforced glass reinforced nylon handle. The handles shall be operable from either side of the door. AND Provide fan section doors with a locking device that is part of the handle. Fan section minimum door width must allow for removal of the fan motor.

D. Access doors shall open against system pressure, wherever feasible. In the event unit size does not allow for in-swing doors on positive pressure compartments, provide a safety pressure relief latch.

2.6 FINISH

A. The units shall be air dried finish with color to suit architect.

• AH-1, AH-2 - SW 2114 Gris Grey

B. The finish shall be zero induction epoxy prime coat with a non-isocyanate acrylic finish. The system shall be chemical curing to assure a hard, chemical resistant surface with strong color stability, UV resistance and gloss protection. Results for final paint thickness test results shall be submitted upon request.

• AH-1, AH-2 - a minimum of 4.5 mil, dry finish thickness and meet ASTM B-117-85 salt spray for 500 hours.

2.7 PLENUM FAN

A. The minimum fan sizes acceptable are as scheduled. Refer to schedule for fan types.

B. Meets the requirements for microbial inertness, therefore suitable for stricter hygiene requirements as well as clean rooms.

C. Free running impeller made from the high-performance composite material with 7 backward-curved, fluted blades.

D. hub and inlet nozzle with measurement device for volume flow measurement.

E. Fan impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced and the complete fan assembly test balanced at operating speed prior to shipment. Manufacturer to provide balance report to owner (upon request).

2.8 ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTATED MOTORS

A. Internally mounted motor shall be provided.



B. Motors shall be premium efficiency protection rating IP20, IP54 UL approved

C. Integrated motor contactor, active temperature management. Externally controllable speed setting via 0-10V

2.9 COILS

A. Coils shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410. Minimum capacity and sizes are as scheduled.

B. Coils shall be tested to 315 psi and be suitable for operation at 250 psi.

C. Tube Material

• AH-1, AH-2 - 5/8" OD tube diameter with 0.020" copper tube wall.

D. Fin Material

• AH-1, AH-2 - 0.0075" aluminum with a maximum 10 fins per inch.

E. Casing Material

• AH-1, AH-2 - galvanized casing.

F. Coil Connection

• AH-1, AH-2 - red brass MPT

G. Coils shall be fully enclosed within the casing and cooling coil drain pans shall extend fully under the coil header and return bends. Coils shall be mounted on angle racks such that the coils may be individually removed. Cooling coil racks shall be 304 stainless steel and heating coil racks shall be galvanized steel.

H. Coil connections shall be extended through the unit casing. Provide grommet seals where the coils penetrate the casing and completely safe off the internal side of the coil penetration.

I. Coils shall be fully drainable. Provide a drain and vent connection on each coil and extend to the outside of the unit casing.

J. Provide a continuously welded 16 gauge 304 stainless steel drain pan double sloped for positive drainage under all cooling coils. Intermediate drain pans for stacked coil configurations are to be the same material as the primary drain pan interconnected with 1" copper drain line.

2.10 FILTERS

A. Final filters shall be as scheduled. The filters shall be high performance, deep pleated, totally rigid and disposable. Filter media shall be high density microfine glass fibers laminated to a non-woven synthetic backing with media support grid, contour stabilizers and a galvanized enclosing frame. Filters shall be listed UL Class II.



• AH-1 - 4" pleated type with a rating of Merv 13.

• AH-2 - 6" pleated type with a rating of Merv 13.

B. The filters shall be installed in a factory fabricated frame of 16-gauge galvanized steel. The frames shall be fitted with gaskets and heavy duty, positive sealing, mechanical fasteners.

C. Provide filter gauge with a signal gauge to indicate change out for each bank of filters. The gauges shall be equal to Dwyer 2000, magnahelic. Filter gauge shall be flush mounted within the casing; surface mounted gauges are not acceptable.

2.11 ELECTRICAL

A. The air handler shall be factory wired and tested.

B. AH-1 - Separate power connections required.

• Fans (208V/3Ph/60Hz)

• Lighting (120V/1Ph/60Hz)

C. AH-2 - Separate power connections required.

• Fans (208V/3Ph/60Hz)

• Lighting (120V/1Ph/60Hz)

D. Wiring shall comply with the latest NEC code requirements. The units shall be CSA/NRTL or ETL listed as a complete unit. Individual listing of components is not acceptable.

E. All power wiring shall be extended to equipment exterior within an externally accessible panel provided by unit manufacturer.

F. All electronically commutated motor control, alarm terminals shall be extended to equipment exterior within an externally accessible panel provided by unit manufacturer.

G. Provide a light within each service section. Lights shall be in vapor proof enclosure with guard and a 25W compact fluorescent bulb. Wire lights to single switch mounted at 48" above the installed level of the equipment. Provide adjacent to the supply fan a GFI duplex service receptacle. Light and service receptacle to remain powered when the unit disconnect is open.

2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.

B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."



C. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

2.13 HIGH POTENTIAL TESTING

A. Upon completion of the air handler internal assembly, the fans shall be high potential tested for electrical connectivity. Power connection shall be connected to the motors by means of the VFD or junction box. Fans shall be verified for current draw, rotation direction, and RPM.

• AH-1, AH-2 - 208V power connection.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of equipment, including recommended service and electrical clearances.

B. Verify that project area is ready to receive Work and opening dimensions are as illustrated by the manufacturer.

C. Verify that proper power supply is available.

D. Verify that the required mechanical services are in place.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Install air handling unit and accessories plumb and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING:

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel, cabinet and coils.

3.4 UNIT MOUNTED CONTROLS

A. All controls shall be field installed by the installing temperature controls contractor and coordinated with the new building automation system. These controls shall include all damper actuators, temperature sensors, pressure sensors, air flow measuring sensors, filter switches, smoke and fire detectors as indicated on the control drawings.

B. Electric and electronic controls shall be wired to a terminal block in a sheet metal enclosure located at a common location mounted on the air handling unit. All pressure sensing controls shall be piped to a common point on the unit with 1/4” compression fittings.

C. Wiring for chilled water control valves shall be field supplied by the installing contractor. Control valve wiring shall be extended to an external junction box located near the coil connections with



the final wiring connection done by the temperature controls contractor. All control valves and piping specialties shall be provided by the temperature controls contractor and/or piping contractor.

D. If the unit requires splitting; junction boxes shall be furnished on each section to allow the control contractor to make final connections in the field. Wiring shall be clearly labeled to allow ease in final interconnections.

E. All controls shall be supplied and installed by the Section 23 09 50 Direct Digital Controls contractor. All wiring shall be performed in a U.L. 508 listed shop.

3.5 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

B. Verify that roof is ready to receive Work and opening dimensions are as illustrated by the manufacturer.

C. Verify that proper power supply is available.

D. Verify that the required mechanical services are in place.

3.6 UNIT SHUTDOWN

A. Contractor shall provide duct smoke detector in main supply air duct from air handling unit or air moving equipment with supply air in excess of 2,000 CFM. Smoke detector shall shut down the air handling unit or air moving equipment when smoke is detected. Connect smoke detector to the building fire alarm system.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect condensate drain pans using pipe sizes indicated on drawings, Type L copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.

D. Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection.

E. Coordinate duct installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on Drawings and with requirements specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."


A. Contractors Field Service: Contractors service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.



B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils with water, and test coils and connections for

leaks. 2. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.

C. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a contractors service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and those connections to

piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.

4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.

5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factory-recommended lubricants.

6. Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone. 7. Verify that outdoor and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain minimum

outdoor-air setting. 8. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation. 9. Install new, clean filters. 10. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected duct systems are in fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following: 1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan

to indicated rpm. 2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. 3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan

performance.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

C. Clean unit cabinet.

3.11 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust.



B. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.

3.12 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a contractors service representative to train the Owner maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.



PACKAGED, SMALL-CAPACITY, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 1

SECTION 237416.11 - PACKAGED, SMALL-CAPACITY, ROOFTOP HEAT PUMP UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes packaged, small-capacity, rooftop air-conditioning units (RTUs) with the following components and accessories: 1. Casings. 2. Fans. 3. Motors. 4. Rotary heat exchangers. 5. Coils. 6. Refrigerant circuit components. 7. Air filtration. 8. Gas furnaces. 9. Dampers. 10. Electrical power connections. 11. Controls. 12. Accessories. 13. Roof curbs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital controls.

B. ECM: Electronically commutated motor.

C. MERV: Minimum efficiency reporting value.

D. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.

E. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, small-capacity, rooftop air-conditioning units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.

F. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

G. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.




A. Product Data: For each RTU. 1. Include manufacturer's technical data. 2. Include rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For RTU supports indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators[ and seismic restraints] and for

designing vibration isolation bases. 2. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating

requirements with roof membrane system. 3. Wind Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind and seismic restraints and

snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Structural members to which RTUs will be attached.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For RTUs, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and

describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements. 4. Restraint of internal components, including fans, coils, and refrigeration components.

C. Product Certificates: Submit certification that specified equipment will withstand wind forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article and in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculations. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of wind force and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Filters: [One] set of filters for each unit.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than [five] years

from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Solid-State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard, but not less

than [three] years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than [three]

years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION

A. AHRI Compliance: 1. Comply with AHRI 210/240 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 2. Comply with AHRI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 3. Comply with AHRI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs. 4. Comply with AHRI 1060 for testing and rating performance for air-to-air exchanger.

B. AMCA Compliance: 1. Comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal for air and sound

performance according to AMCA 211 and AMCA 311. 2. Damper leakage tested according to AMCA 500-D. 3. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

D. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

F. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.



G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carrier

B. Lennox

C. Trane


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design mounting and restraints for RTUs, including comprehensive engineering analysis. 1. Design RTU supports to comply with [wind] [and] [seismic] performance requirements.

B. Seismic Performance: RTUs, accessories, and components shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to [ASCE/SEI 7].

2.4 The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event". CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. Exterior Casing Thickness: [0.052 inch] [0.0626 inch] [0.079 inch] thick.

B. Supply-Air Fan: 1. Fan Type: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal. 2. Enclosure Materials: [Cast iron] 3. Motor Characteristics:

a. Horsepower: see schedule. b. Motor Speed: see schedule c. Volts: see schedule. d. Phase: see schedule. e. Hertz: 60. f. Full-Load Amperes: see schedule. g. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: see schedule h. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: see schedule.

C. Relief (Exhaust)-Air Fan:

D. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. Total Cooling Capacity: 2. Sensible Cooling Capacity: 3. Entering-Air Dry-Bulb Temperature:. 4. Entering-Air Wet-Bulb Temperature:. 5. Coating: [Cathodic epoxy].

E. Compressors: 1. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: [Two] 2. Compressor Speed: [Variable].



3. Suction Temperature: 120 4. Seasonal Energy-Efficiency Ratio (SEER):14. 5. Entering-Air Temperature: 6. Air-Temperature Rise:.

F. Dampers: 1. Outdoor-Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for zero to [25] [30] percent outdoor air, with

[motorized] damper filter. 2. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: [Parallel] blade galvanized-steel dampers

mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect so dampers operate simultaneously.

3. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, as required by ASHRAE/IES 90.1. 4. Barometric relief dampers.

G. Recirculating-Air Filters: 1. [One-] [Two-]wide filter racks. 2. Thickness: [1 inch] [2 inches] <Insert dimension>. 3. Pleated with minimum [90] percent arrestance, and [MERV 13].

H. RTU Electrical Characteristics for Single-Point Connection: 1. Voltage: 2. Phase:. 3. Hertz: 60. 4. Full-Load Amperes:. 5. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: 6. Maximum Overcurrent Protection:.

2.5 CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.

B. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with [1-inch] foam insulation and seal moisture tight for [R-7] performance.

C. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs. 1. Corrosion Protection: [500] [750] [2500] <Insert time> hours' salt spray test according to

ASTM B 117.

D. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I. 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Liner materials shall have airstream surface coated with erosion- and temperature-resistant

coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric. 4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

E. Plastic Condensate Drain Pans: Fabricated using rigid heavy plastic polymer, a minimum of 2 inches deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1 for design and construction of drain pans.

F. Condensate Drain Pans: Fabricated using stainless-steel sheet 0.025 inch thick, a minimum of 2 inches deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1 for design and construction of drain pans.



1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture tight.

2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple.

G. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

2.6 FANS

A. Supply-Air Fans: Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls. 1. Direct-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Motor shall be resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. 2. Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Motors shall be installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently

mounted in the casing.

B. Condenser-Coil Fan: propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated [ECM] motors.

2.7 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

C. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

D. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 104 deg Fand at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

E. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

F. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

G. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements.

H. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

I. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

J. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

K. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

L. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

M. Insulation: Class F

N. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than [324T].



O. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

P. Controls: 1. Starting relay, factory mounted and wired, and manual motor starter for field wiring. 2. Variable-frequency controller, factory mounted and wired, permitting input of field

connected 4-20 mA or 1-10-V control signal. 3. Variable-frequency controller, factory mounted and wired, with exhaust-air sensor to vary

rotor speed and maintain exhaust temperature above freezing. 4. Variable-frequency controller, factory mounted and wired, with exhaust- and outdoor-air

sensors, automatic changeover thermostat and set-point adjuster, to vary rotor speed and maintain[ exhaust temperature above freezing and] air differential temperature above set point. Rotor speed shall increase to maximum when exhaust-air temperature is less than outdoor-air temperature.

5. Control energy recovery to permit air economizer operation. a. Bypass dampers to assist energy recovery control.

6. Pilot-Light Indicator: Display rotor rotation and speed. 7. Speed Settings: Adjustable settings for maximum and minimum rotor speed limits. 8. Defrost cycle.

2.8 COILS

A. Coil Coating: [Baked phenolic]

B. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. [Copper]-plate fin and seamless[ internally grooved] copper tube in steel casing with

equalizing-type vertical distributor. 2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coils from contacting steel coil frame or condensate

pan. 3. Coil Split: Interlaced. 4. Coated.

2.9 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS

A. Compressor: Hermetic, [variable-speed] scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief[, and crankcase heater].

B. Refrigeration Specialties: 1. Refrigerant: R-410A. 2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 3. Refrigerant filter/dryer. 4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. 5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. 6. Minimum off-time relay. 7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. 8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. 9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor. 10. Hot-gas reheat solenoid valve [modulating] with a replaceable magnetic coil. 11. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil. 12. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion valves

with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.



2.10 AIR FILTRATION

A. Minimum arrestance and MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2.

2.11 DAMPERS

A. Leakage Rate: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

B. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position.

2.12 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS

A. RTU shall have a single connection of power to unit with[ unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and] control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.

2.13 CONTROLS

A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."

B. Basic Unit Controls: 1. Control-voltage transformer. 2. Wall-mounted thermostat or sensor with the following features:

a. Heat-cool-off switch. b. Fan on-auto switch. c. Fan-speed switch. d. [Automatic] changeover. e. Adjustable deadband. f. [Exposed] set point. g. [Exposed] indication. h. [Degree F] indication. i. Unoccupied-period-override push button. j. Data entry and access port to input temperature set points, occupied and unoccupied

periods, and output room temperature, supply-air temperature, operating mode, and status.

C. DDC Controller: 1. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup. 2. Safety Control Operation:

a. Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if smoke is detected. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire-alarm control panel.

b. Firestats: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if air greater than [130 deg F] enters unit. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire-alarm control panel.

c. Fire-Alarm Control Panel Interface: Provide control interface to coordinate with operating sequence described in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" and Section 283112 "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System."

d. Low-Discharge Temperature: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if supply-air temperature is less than [40 deg F].

e. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost sequence.

3. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on [seven] [365]-day clock with a minimum of [two] [four] programmable periods per day.

4. Unoccupied Period:



a. Heating Setback: [10 deg F]. b. Cooling Setback: System off. c. Override Operation: [Two] hours.

5. Supply Fan Operation: a. Occupied Periods: Run fan continuously. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle fan to maintain setback temperature.

6. Refrigerant Circuit Operation: a. Occupied Periods: Cycle or stage compressors[, and operate hot-gas bypass] to

match compressor output to cooling load to maintain [room] [discharge] temperature[ and humidity]. Cycle condenser fans to maintain maximum hot-gas pressure. Operate low-ambient control kit to maintain minimum hot-gas pressure.

b. Unoccupied Periods: [Compressors off] [Cycle compressors and condenser fans for heating to maintain setback temperature].

c. Switch reversing valve for heating or cooling mode on air-to-air heat pump. d. Occupied Periods: Open to [25] percent. e. Unoccupied Periods: Close the outdoor-air damper.

7. Economizer Outdoor-Air Damper Operation: a. Morning [warm-up] cycles. b. Occupied Periods: Open to [25] <Insert number> percent fixed minimum intake, and

maximum 100 percent of the fan capacity. Controller shall permit air-side economizer operation when outdoor air is less than [60 deg F]. Use [outdoor-air temperature] [mixed-air and outdoor-air temperature] [outdoor-air enthalpy] to adjust mixing dampers. During economizer cycle operation, lock out cooling.

c. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper. d. Outdoor-Airflow Monitor: Accuracy maximum plus or minus 5 percent within 15 and

100 percent of total outdoor air. Monitor microprocessor shall adjust for temperature, and output shall range from [2- to 10-V dc].

8. Carbon Dioxide Sensor Operation: a. Occupied Periods: Reset minimum outdoor-air ratio down to minimum [10] percent to

maintain maximum [1000-ppm] concentration. b. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper.

9. Terminal-Unit Relays: a. Provide heating- and cooling-mode changeover relays compatible with terminal

control system required in Section 233600 "Air Terminal Units" and Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."

D. Interface Requirements for HVAC Instrumentation and Control System: 1. Interface relay for scheduled operation. 2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation and diagnostic code

storage. 3. Provide [BACnet] compatible interface for central HVAC control workstation for the

following: a. Adjusting set points. b. Monitoring supply fan start, stop, and operation. c. Inquiring data to include supply- and room-air temperature. d. Monitoring occupied and unoccupied operations. e. Monitoring constant and variable motor loads. f. Monitoring variable-frequency drive operation. g. Monitoring cooling load. h. Monitoring economizer cycles. i. Monitoring air-distribution static pressure and ventilation air volume.



2.14 ACCESSORIES

A. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss.

B. Factory- or field-installed, demand-controlled ventilation.

C. Safeties: 1. Smoke detector. 2. Condensate overflow switch. 3. Phase-loss [reversal ]protection. 4. High [and low ]pressure control.

D. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.

E. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.

F. Concentric diffuser with white louvers and polished aluminum return grilles, insulated diffuser box with mounting flanges, and interior transition.

G. Door switches to disable heating or reset set point when open.

H. Outdoor-air intake weather hood[ with moisture eliminator].

I. Oil separator.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.

B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to [AHRI Guideline B.] Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.

B. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural [curbs]. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts.

C. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install RTUs on existing



2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic-control devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with duct installation requirements specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under

entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300

"Air Duct Accessories." 4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure. 5. Install normal-weight, 3000-psi, compressive strength (28-day) concrete mix inside roof

curb, [4 inches] thick. Concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified with concrete.

B. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for

compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper

motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. RTU will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. [Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform] [Perform] startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 3. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 4. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans. 5. Inspect internal insulation. 6. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 7. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 8. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 9. Verify that filters are installed. 10. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris. 11. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.



12. Connect and purge gas line. 13. Remove packing from vibration isolators. 14. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers. 15. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings. 16. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 17. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 18. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Start refrigeration system. b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature. c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

19. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 20. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 21. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner for

peak efficiency: a. Measure gas pressure on manifold. b. Inspect operation of power vents. c. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. d. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge. e. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen

concentration. f. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate

and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air. 22. Calibrate thermostats. 23. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 24. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. 25. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a

minimum of 15 deg F above return-air temperature: a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

26. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown.

27. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. a. Supply-air volume. b. Return-air volume. c. Relief-air volume. d. Outdoor-air intake volume.

28. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following: a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures. b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air

intake. 29. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect

the following: a. Low-temperature safety operation. b. Filter high-pressure differential alarm. c. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover. d. Relief-air fan operation. e. Smoke and firestat alarms.

30. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing filters with new filters.



3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within [12] months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to [two] visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. [Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train] Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs.

END OF SECTION 237416.11


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems

communications cables and Classes 1, 2 and 3 control cables. 2. Section 260533 “ Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" 3. Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials.

B. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association.

C. IEEE: Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers.

D. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

E. NETA ATS: InterNational Electrical Testing Association - Acceptance Testing Specification.

F. VFC: Variable frequency controller.


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each type of product, indicating conductor/cable construction, insulation material, thickness of insulation, jacket, cable stranding, and voltage rating of each type of conductor/cable specified, splices and terminations. Indicate date and place of manufacture for each conductor/cable, cable, splice and termination.

B. Manufacturer’s ISO certification.


A. Qualification Data: For Independent Testing Agency.



A. Field quality-control reports. Perform field testing of cables per para 3.8. Submit six (6) copies of field test reports to owner’s representative within two (2) weeks of completion of test.


A. General Requirements: The low voltage power conductors and cable shall be copper, minimum 600V rated unless otherwise indicated. Aluminum conductors and cables shall not be accepted unless otherwise indicated.

B. Materials and installation shall meet or exceed requirements in the following referenced standards and shall be listed and labelled by UL. 1. ICEA S-93-639/ NEMA WC 74. 2. AEIC CS8. 3. UL 1072. 4. IEEE. 5. ASTM. 6. NEMA.

C. Conductors and cables shall be of the same manufacturer, and shipped to the job site in original unbroken reels.

D. Conductors and cables shall be manufactured with in twelve (12) months of installation. Date of manufacture shall be clearly marked on conductors or conductor reels.

E. Manufacturer shall have minimum ten (10) years experience in the manufacturer of conductors and cables similar to those specified on this project.

F. Manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 and ISO 9002 certification.

G. All conductors and cables shall be new and supplied by a local distributor.

H. American made conductors and cables have been acceptable. If non-domestic product is submitted, notice is hereby given that extensive testing shall be required to insure quality and conformance to the Specifications. All of the testing procedures and results shall be satisfactory to the Owner’s representative. The Contractor shall bear all costs for testing and shall be responsible for all costs associated with travel, lodging, etc. for the Owner’s Representative to witness the test at the manufacturer’s testing facility. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner at $1,200 per man day or part thereof for the time required to witness the testing.

I. Testing: Provide the services of an independent qualified testing laboratory to perform the specified field tests. Notify the College’s Representative fourteen (14) days in advance of performance of work requiring testing.

J. Conductors, cables, splices and terminations shall be manufactured within twelve (12) months of installation. Each item shall have a permanent marking on the product or the original manufacturers’ package indicating the date of manufacture unless otherwise noted.

K. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Testing agency shall be an independent company; shall have been a member of NETA for

a minimum of last ten (10) years and has permanent in-house testing engineers and technicians involved with testing of low voltage electrical power conductors and cables similar to those specified on this project.

2. Testing company shall be located with 50 miles radius of the project. 3. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.



4. Field Testing technician and supervisor shall have minimum ten (10) years’ experience in field testing of low voltage power conductors and cables of the type and rating similar to the conductors and cables to be tested on this project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 2. Southwire Incorporated 3. Alpha Wire. 4. Belden Inc. 5. Encore Wire Corporation.

B. Conductor Material: Electrical grade, soft drawn annealed copper, 98 percent conductivity, and fabricated in accordance with ASTM and IPCEA standards. Minimum size is number 12 for branch circuits, number 14 stranded for control wiring. Aluminum conductors are not permitted. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2, Type XHHW-2.

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire.

E. VFC Cable: 1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and 2013 CEC for Type TC-ER cable. 2. Type TC-ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85

percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.

F. Provide separate neutral with each branch circuit serving outlets. When dedicated neutrals are provided, use color spiral to match associated phase.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Ideal Industries, Inc. 2. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 3. NSi Industries LLC. 4. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 5. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 6. Tyco Electronics.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.














C. Copper conductors shall be terminated in copper or bronze mechanical connectors or lugs or tool applied compression connections made of copper for all connections except those on wiring devices.

D. Splices in wires No. 10 and smaller shall be made with twist-on splicing connector in accordance with UL486-C. Connections in wires No. 8 and larger shall be made with compression type connectors in accordance with UL486-A and wrapped with insulated tape in accordance with UL501. Insulating tape shall be applied in a minimum of two layers of half wrap or built to match the overall insulation of the wire.

E. Splices in underground pull boxes shall be made submersible type and made using “3M” Scotch-cast epoxy kits.

F. Pressure type connectors are not permitted.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: UL Listed and labeled as defined in 2013 CEC, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with 2013 CEC.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 1/0 AWG and larger. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

C. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

F. VFC Output Circuits: Type TC-ER cable with braided shield.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. All conductors and cables shall be installed in a raceway.

B. Before installing conductors and cables in existing conduits, verify the continuity of each conduit; each surface conduit is properly supported per code and clear of any debris.

C. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

D. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

E. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

F. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

G. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors]. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Each conductor shall be factory color coded by conductor manufacturer. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."



3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test service entrance conductors, feeder conductors and the conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services] for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical tests stated in latest NETA Acceptance Testing Specification section 7.3.2 (Inspection and Test Procedures-Cables, Low Voltage-600V Maximum). Certify compliance with test parameters per NETA tables.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. Include color scan images. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.

B. Section includes grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Underground distribution grounding.

1.3 Definitions:

A. NETA ATS: International Electrical Testing Association - Acceptance Testing Specification.

B. NETA MTS: International Electrical Testing Association - Maintenance Testing Specification.

C. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.

D. CEC: California Electrical Code 2013 Edition.


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical catalog cuts for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Site drawings to scale including details showing location and size of each field connection of grounding system.


A. Informational Submittals: Plans drawn to scale (1/4”=1’-0”) showing dimensioned locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Grounding conductors, connectors. 2. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified independent testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

C. Field quality-control reports. Submit written test reports including the following: 1. Test procedures used.



2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at grounding

connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS, NFPA 70B. a. Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within

specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not.

b. Include recommended testing intervals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Testing agency shall be an independent company; shall have been a member of NETA for

a minimum of last ten (10) years and has permanent in-house testing engineers and technicians involved with testing of grounding systems similar to those specified on this project.

2. Testing company shall be located with 50 miles radius of the project. 3. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 4. Field Testing technician and supervisor shall have minimum ten (10) years’ experience in

field testing of rounding systems of the type and rating similar to the systems to be tested on this project.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 2013 CEC, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING ELECTRODES, CONDUCTORS, CONNECTOR, BUS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal: 1. Grounding Conductors and cables:

a. Southwire b. American Insulated Wire c. Okonite

2.2 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by UL for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits in the same conduit containing phase and neutral conductors. Comply with 2013 CEC, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by 2013 CEC are indicated.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by 2013 CEC. : 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Receptacle circuits. 3. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 4. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Flexible raceway runs. 6. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from

building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

C. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

3.4 LABELING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green. 1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason,

notify the facility manager."


A. Testing Agency: Engage an independent qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Refer to section

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical

connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation

and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.



G. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.

H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and

installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.


A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems.



2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.











5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc.

3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.

4. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel.

5. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:













b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by 2013 CEC. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in 2013 CEC.









C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.





RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Surface raceways. 6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 280528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface

pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metal tubing

B. ENT: Electrical non-metallic tubing

C. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

E. LFMC: Liquidtite flexible metal conduit

F. LFNC: Liquitite flexible non-metallic conduit.

G. RNC: Rigid non-metallic conduit

H. RTRC: Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Each conduit shall bear manufacturer’s trademark and UL label.

B. Each type of conduit and fittings shall be of a single manufacturer. Multiple manufacturer’s of the same material are not acceptable.



C. Comply with California Electric Code (CEC)


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,

documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,

documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and

describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements. 4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the

certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 2. Electri-Flex Company. 3. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.







4. Republic Conduit. 5. Robroy Industries. 6. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 7. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 8. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled as defined in 2013 CEC, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and 2013 CEC. 2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

I. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in 2013 CEC, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. CANTEX Inc. 2. Condux International, Inc. 3. Electri-Flex Company. 4. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 5. RACO; a Hubbell company. 6. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in 2013 CEC, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.















D. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

E. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.

F. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.

G. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

H. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

I. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

J. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to 2013 CEC. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in 2013 CEC, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in 2013 CEC, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.












C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

D. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.

E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be UL listed and labeled as defined in 2013 CEC, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Hubbell Wiring Systems b. Wiremold / Legrand. c. Mono-Systems, Inc. d. Panduit Corp.

C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division. b. Wiremold / Legrand. c. Mono-Systems, Inc. d. Panduit Corp.

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 4. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.

















5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 7. Robroy Industries. 8. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 9. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep, 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep.

J. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

L. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and

removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in 2013 CEC, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC, IMC 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC, IMC, EMT








3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC

4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT or RNC. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC, IMC. Raceway locations include

the following: a. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC, IMC.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inchtrade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type

of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with 2013 CEC limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.



E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inchesof enclosures to which attached.

I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in

an enclosure.

J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 250lbs (113 kgs) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Provide acrylic identification tags (2”X4”) at each end indicating the source. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

R. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inchradius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to 2013 CEC and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a



blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to 2013 CEC.

T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by 2013 CEC.

U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

V. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F. temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.



3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 - 1

SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement of

VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating that

products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain

ends. 2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.



B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM, Nitrile (Buna N) rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: [Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following manufacturers: a. Presealed Systems.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.









B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated. 2. Sealant shall have VOC content of <Insert value> g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and

raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

4. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening.



2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install PVC Coated cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s catalog cut sheets for each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with CEC 2013 EDITION.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. Adhesive type labels shall be used for only applications indicated in this section.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Feeders and Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

B. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.



C. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

2.4 CONDUCTOR AND CABLES IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color coding of conductors: Provide color coded insulation by conductor manufacturer. Coordinate with Division 26, Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables". If permitted by owner’s representative, install color coding conductor tape for temporary installations only. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer. 2. Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black

ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag.

B. Provide tags on each pull rope of spare conduits showing starting point and end point of spare conduits.

2.5 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with 2013 CEC and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size

required for application. 2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: 1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch

(1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT

OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM) for electrical service 600V or less."

3. High Voltage Equipment Warning "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT". 4. Provide other warning labels and signs as required by applicable code and regulation.

2.6 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.



1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm) except designation which will be in 1/2 inch letters unless otherwise indicated.

B. Labels shall include the following information. Color of nameplate shall be black for equipment connected to normal power, red for equipment connected to emergency power, and blue for equipment connected to Un-interruptible Power Supply. Color of letters shall be white. 1. Panel or equipment designation. 2. Rating: Volt, Amps, No. of phase and wires, horsepower, etc. 3. AIC Rating (RMS Symmetrical Amps). 4. Fed from information. 5. Manufacturer Shop Order number. 6. Date of Installation. 7. Other information as requested by Owner. 8. Use 1/4 inch to identify control switches, indicating lights, and other miscellaneous devices

on the bucket door.

C. Adhesive labels and nameplates are not acceptable.

2.8 WIRING DEVICES LABELS

A. Identify wiring devices with heavy duty clear vinyl polyester tape “Weber” unless otherwise indicated. Provide labels on the device cover plate made of non-metallic materials. Color of letters shall be black for device connected to normal power, color of letters shall be red for device connected to emergency power. Labels shall be printed, flexible, self-adhesive type. In addition write the circuit no. (e.g. 1PA-2) on the inside of the device cover plate of non-metallic material using a permanent marker.

B. For stainless steel cover plates, engrave information on the device cover plate.

C. Device (receptacles, switches etc.) label shall include panel designation and circuit number.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).



B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

I. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label bands. Install labels at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Power

Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600V or less: Provide factory color coded conductors as indicated in Division 26 “Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables”. Color coding tape may be field applied (if specified on the documents or permitted in writing by Owner’s representative) to identify phase conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, handholes and other



locations where conductors are spliced and terminated. Colors for factory-assembled cable, such as MC and AC, must match colors listed in first paragraph below. . 1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for

ungrounded service, feeders and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if

authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral : White 5) Ground Green

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral : Grey 5) Ground : Green

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

C. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and

pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by

manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the

Operation and Maintenance Manual.

E. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by 2013 CEC and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

F. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Baked-enamel warning signs. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment

including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

G. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

H. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.



Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems Verify requirements with Owner’s representative. 1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor. d. Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or

NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panel board manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved laminated acrylic label.

b. Enclosures, electrical, telecom, alarm and communication system cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panel boards or equipment supplied by the secondary. For pad-mount transformers- indicate type and size of fuses on a separate 3” X 5” plastic laminated label and install on the inside surface of the door of the transformer.

e. Motor-control centers. f. Enclosed switches including ATS. g. Enclosed circuit breakers. h. Enclosed controllers. i. Variable-speed controllers. j. Push-button stations. k. Power transfer equipment including transfer switches. l. Contactors. m. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. n. Monitoring and control equipment.



WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Weather-resistant receptacles. 4. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 5. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: 1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.




A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single manufacturer. Switches, receptacles and cover plates shall be of the same manufacturer.

B. Comply with National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) standards. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

C. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in the production of wiring devices specified and shall have ISO 9001 and 9002 certifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 3. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: UL Listed and labeled, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.







1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following manufacturers: a. Hubbell; HBL5361 (single), HBL5362 (duplex). b. Leviton; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex). c. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

2. Description: Grounded, industrial extra heavy duty specifications grade, back- and side-wired, single-piece grounding brass strap with integral ground, impact-resistant thermoplastic nylon cover and body, smooth face, with separate grounding screw and NEMA 5-20R plug configurations.

B. General Description: 1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides

proper GFCI protection.

C. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

manufacturers: a. Hubbell; GFR5352L. b. Pass & Seymour; 2095. c. Leviton; 7590.

2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

manufacturers: a. Hubbell; HBL2310. b. Leviton; 2310. c. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.

2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

manufacturers: a. Hubbell; HBL1221. b. Leviton; 1221-2. c. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1. d. Three Way: e. Hubbell; HBL1223. f. Leviton; 1223-2. g. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.























B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with cover.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray unless otherwise indicated or

required by 2013 CEC or device listing.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device

boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on

devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of 2013 CEC,

Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were

installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)

in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.



7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the left.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. Coordinate both paragraphs below with Drawings.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

B. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports. Submit reports within two (2) weeks of completion of tests.



FUSES 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches, panelboards and

motor-control centers. 2. Plug fuses rated 125-V ac and less for use in plug-fuse-type enclosed switches. 3. Plug-fuse adapters for use in Edison-base, plug-fuse sockets. 4. Spare-fuse cabinets.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to

accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings. a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating,

local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating. b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment

calculations are based. 2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, and ratings. 3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.

5. Coordination charts and tables and related data. 6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


FUSES 262813 - 2


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

two of each size and type.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 2013 CEC, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with 2013 CEC.

E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.







FUSES 262813 - 3

2.3 PLUG FUSES

A. Characteristics: UL 248-11, nonrenewable plug fuses; 125-V ac.

2.4 PLUG-FUSE ADAPTERS

A. Characteristics: Adapters for using Type S, rejection-base plug fuses in Edison-base fuseholders or sockets; ampere ratings matching fuse ratings; irremovable once installed.

2.5 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-coded cam lock and pull. 1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity

minimum. 2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. 3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm) high letters on exterior of door. 4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses: 1. Feeders: Class RK1, fast acting 2. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 3. Other Branch Circuits: Class J, fast acting. 4. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.


FUSES 262813 - 4

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install plug-fuse adapters in Edison-base fuseholders and sockets. Ensure that adapters are irremovable once installed.

C. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.



ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Receptacle switches. 4. Shunt trip switches. 5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 6. Molded-case switches. 7. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.



6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

D. Manufacturer's field service report.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit

breakers. 2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.



1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 2013 CEC, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with 2013 CEC.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than 14 days in advance of proposed interruption of electric

service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.







B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are

specified. 4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES


B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

2.3 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 3. Littelfuse, Inc.

B. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA interrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.

C. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and secondary fuses, with a control power source of enough capacity to operate shunt trip, connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.










2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS


B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."







C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges
